US20150305462A1 - Case With A Removable Magnetic Material Back For A Mobile Electronic Device - Google Patents
Case With A Removable Magnetic Material Back For A Mobile Electronic Device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20150305462A1 US20150305462A1 US14/750,538 US201514750538A US2015305462A1 US 20150305462 A1 US20150305462 A1 US 20150305462A1 US 201514750538 A US201514750538 A US 201514750538A US 2015305462 A1 US2015305462 A1 US 2015305462A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- magnetic
- case
- cord
- strap
- magnets
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 239000000696 magnetic material Substances 0.000 title claims abstract description 276
- 230000005291 magnetic effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 825
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims description 385
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 claims description 110
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 claims description 28
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 claims description 22
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 claims description 20
- 229920001971 elastomer Polymers 0.000 claims description 19
- 239000004744 fabric Substances 0.000 claims description 16
- 239000005060 rubber Substances 0.000 claims description 12
- 239000010985 leather Substances 0.000 claims description 7
- 239000006260 foam Substances 0.000 claims description 3
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 171
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 113
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 67
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 51
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 48
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 47
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 47
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 42
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 33
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 32
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 30
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 28
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 28
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 22
- 230000002401 inhibitory effect Effects 0.000 description 21
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 21
- 239000013013 elastic material Substances 0.000 description 20
- 239000003973 paint Substances 0.000 description 19
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 18
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 17
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 17
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 15
- 238000005411 Van der Waals force Methods 0.000 description 13
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 12
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron Chemical compound [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 229910001172 neodymium magnet Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 9
- 238000001746 injection moulding Methods 0.000 description 8
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 239000011253 protective coating Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000000806 elastomer Substances 0.000 description 7
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nickel Chemical compound [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000003302 ferromagnetic material Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000002907 paramagnetic material Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920001084 poly(chloroprene) Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 229920002799 BoPET Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229910001209 Low-carbon steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000005041 Mylar™ Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000010941 cobalt Substances 0.000 description 4
- GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N cobalt atom Chemical compound [Co] GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 210000005069 ears Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 230000001747 exhibiting effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000003678 scratch resistant effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920000742 Cotton Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229910052779 Neodymium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910000831 Steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910001177 Ticonal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910000828 alnico Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000005266 casting Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000000919 ceramic Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910017052 cobalt Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000004040 coloring Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000748 compression moulding Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005034 decoration Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- -1 etc.) Substances 0.000 description 3
- 210000003811 finger Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 239000011888 foil Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 3
- QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N neodymium atom Chemical compound [Nd] QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910052761 rare earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 150000002910 rare earth metals Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000010959 steel Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920002725 thermoplastic elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229910052720 vanadium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910000859 α-Fe Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000004593 Epoxy Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910000640 Fe alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- QJVKUMXDEUEQLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N [B].[Fe].[Nd] Chemical compound [B].[Fe].[Nd] QJVKUMXDEUEQLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 2
- 235000012489 doughnuts Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000000428 dust Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002783 friction material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000976 ink Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000012212 insulator Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005304 joining Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000000465 moulding Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920002635 polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004814 polyurethane Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910000938 samarium–cobalt magnet Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000000565 sealant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000009958 sewing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004804 winding Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910000531 Co alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- JOYRKODLDBILNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethyl urethane Chemical compound CCOC(N)=O JOYRKODLDBILNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000990 Ni alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000007792 addition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000254 damaging effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000001988 diarylethenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000004069 differentiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003292 diminished effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005670 electromagnetic radiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011152 fibreglass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004905 finger nail Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007373 indentation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007641 inkjet printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011810 insulating material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004922 lacquer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000734 martensite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000010422 painting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920006255 plastic film Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000728 polyester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006267 polyester film Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006254 polymer film Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000004053 quinones Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003813 thumb Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000012780 transparent material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001429 visible spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000001993 wax Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003466 welding Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
- H04M1/02—Constructional features of telephone sets
- H04M1/15—Protecting or guiding telephone cords
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A45—HAND OR TRAVELLING ARTICLES
- A45C—PURSES; LUGGAGE; HAND CARRIED BAGS
- A45C11/00—Receptacles for purposes not provided for in groups A45C1/00-A45C9/00
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
- B65D63/00—Flexible elongated elements, e.g. straps, for bundling or supporting articles
- B65D63/10—Non-metallic straps, tapes, or bands; Filamentary elements, e.g. strings, threads or wires; Joints between ends thereof
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B1/00—Details of transmission systems, not covered by a single one of groups H04B3/00 - H04B13/00; Details of transmission systems not characterised by the medium used for transmission
- H04B1/38—Transceivers, i.e. devices in which transmitter and receiver form a structural unit and in which at least one part is used for functions of transmitting and receiving
- H04B1/3827—Portable transceivers
- H04B1/3888—Arrangements for carrying or protecting transceivers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
- H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
- H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
- H04R1/1033—Cables or cables storage, e.g. cable reels
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2307/00—Properties of the layers or laminate
- B32B2307/20—Properties of the layers or laminate having particular electrical or magnetic properties, e.g. piezoelectric
- B32B2307/208—Magnetic, paramagnetic
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2307/00—Properties of the layers or laminate
- B32B2307/40—Properties of the layers or laminate having particular optical properties
- B32B2307/402—Coloured
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
- B65D2313/00—Connecting or fastening means
- B65D2313/04—Connecting or fastening means of magnetic type
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
- H04R2499/00—Aspects covered by H04R or H04S not otherwise provided for in their subgroups
- H04R2499/10—General applications
- H04R2499/11—Transducers incorporated or for use in hand-held devices, e.g. mobile phones, PDA's, camera's
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T156/00—Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
- Y10T156/10—Methods of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T29/00—Metal working
- Y10T29/49—Method of mechanical manufacture
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T428/00—Stock material or miscellaneous articles
- Y10T428/31504—Composite [nonstructural laminate]
- Y10T428/31786—Of polyester [e.g., alkyd, etc.]
Definitions
- the disclosed embodiments relate generally to a case with a removable magnetic material back for a mobile electronic device.
- Many portable electronic devices generate audio output.
- some portable electronic devices support wireless headphones that receive audio signals wirelessly (e.g., Bluetooth, etc.)
- many users of electronic devices still use wired headphones that receive audio signals through an audio cord connected to an audio port of the portable electronic device.
- wired headphones can become easily tangled when the portable electronic device is not being used.
- the cord of the wired headphone may become tangled when the portable electronic device is stored in a bag or a purse.
- other electronic devices may use video cables, audio cables, and/or power cords that present similar cord management issues to the user.
- One solution to this problem is to detach the cord of the wired headphone from the portable electronic device and to store the wired headphones separately.
- the wired headphones may be stored in a special pouch or container.
- the cord of the wired headphones may be wrapped around itself so that the cord does not become tangled.
- detaching the cord from the portable electronic device is cumbersome because the cord must be reattached (and possibly removed from a container or unwound) prior to being able to use the wired headphones with the portable electronic device.
- the headphones may become lost or may be forgotten if the headphones are detached from the portable electronic device.
- Another solution to this problem is to wrap the cord of the wired headphones around the portable electronic device without detaching the cord from the portable electronic device.
- the cord of the wired headphone may become unwrapped and tangled.
- the cord may be organized when it is wrapped around the portable electronic device, once the cord is detached from the portable electronic device, the cord may become unwrapped.
- Some embodiments provide a case for an object.
- the case has a front, a back, a bottom, a top, a first side, and a second side.
- substantially all of the case is made of magnetic material.
- the magnetic material is magnetic metal, such as SAE 1008 steel; an alloy of iron, cobalt, and/or nickel; and/or SAE Type 416 stainless steel.
- the case has a bumper to at least partially prevent a surface of the object from contacting the magnetic material of the case.
- the bumper is disposed between the case and an object when the object is in the case.
- the object is a mobile electronic device.
- Some embodiments provide a case for a mobile electronic device.
- the case has a front, a back, a bottom, a top, a first side, and a second side. At least a portion of the case comprises a color-changing material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions. In some embodiments, the majority of the back of the case comprises a color-changing material. In some embodiments, the case includes designs that incorporate color-changing materials.
- the color-changing material is a thermochromic material that changes color due to a change in temperature of the thermochromic material.
- the thermochromic material is a thermochromic coating, paint, and/or film.
- the thermochromic material includes thermochromic liquid crystals and/or leuco dye.
- the case includes an insulator between the thermochromic material and the object within the case.
- the color-changing material is photochromic material, such as a photochromic coating, paint, and/or film.
- At least a portion of the back of the case is made of a magnetic material
- at least a portion of at least one of the front, bottom, top, first side, and second side is made of one or more non-magnetic materials.
- the skin includes a sheet with a first side and a second side, where the first side has magnets and/or magnetic materials for removably attaching the sheet to a case for a mobile electronic device that has a magnetic material component.
- the skin also includes a second side with a decoration, such that when the sheet is removably attached to the case, the decorative treatment is presented to a user.
- the sheet has one or more through-holes.
- the decoration comprises a thermochromic material, a photochormic material, a metameric material, a color, and/or a design.
- Some embodiments provide a method of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device.
- the method includes providing one or more color-changing materials that change color when subjected to different environmental conditions, providing one or more non color-changing materials, forming one or more color-changing portions of a case, forming one or more non color-changing portions of a case, and creating a case for a mobile electronic device incorporating the one or more color-changing portions and the one or more non color-changing portions.
- Some embodiments provide a method of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device.
- the method includes providing one or more color-changing materials that change color when subjected to different environmental conditions, providing one or more non color-changing materials, and forming a case for a mobile electronic device including the color-changing and the non color-changing materials.
- Some embodiments provide a method of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device.
- the method includes providing a case for a mobile electronic device, and applying to at least a portion of the case a color-changing material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions.
- Some embodiments provide a method of manufacturing a case for an electronic device.
- the method includes providing a case for a mobile electronic device, applying a thermochromic coating to at least a portion of the case, and applying an ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating over at least a portion of the thermochromic coating.
- at least a portion of the case is black, and the thermochromic coating is applied over at least a portion of the black portion of the case.
- a clear coating is applied over at least a portion of the ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating.
- the cases are manufactured with metameric materials.
- FIG. 1 illustrates components of a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 2A illustrates a cord wrapped around a magnetic strap and an electronic device, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 2B illustrates a cord wrapped around a magnetic strap and the electronic device, wherein the magnetic strap is folded over the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 2C illustrates a cord removed from the electronic device, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 2D illustrates a cord wrapped around a magnetic strap and a hand of an end user, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 2E illustrates a cord wrapped around a magnetic strap and the hand of the end user, wherein the magnetic strap is folded over the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 2F illustrates a cord removed from the hand of the end user, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 2G illustrates a cord that is partially wrapped around a magnetic strap and the electronic device, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 2H illustrates a process for deploying a cord wrapped around the electronic device, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 2J continues the process of deploying the cord illustrated in FIG. 2H , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 2K continues the process of deploying the cord illustrated in FIG. 2J , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 3A illustrates a process for managing a cord using a magnetic strap and magnetic beads, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 3B continues the process illustrated in FIG. 3A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 3C continues the process illustrated in FIG. 3B , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 3D continues the process illustrated in FIG. 3C , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 3E continues the process illustrated in FIG. 3D , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 3F illustrates a configuration to secure the free end of the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 3G illustrates an alternative configuration to secure the free end of the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 3H illustrates an alternative configuration to secure the free end of the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 3J illustrates an alternative configuration to secure the free end of the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 3K illustrates an alternative configuration to secure the free end of the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 4A illustrates a process for deploying a cord wrapped around the electronic device with the assistance of a magnetic material located on the electronic device, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 4B continues the process of deploying the cord illustrated in FIG. 4A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 4C continues the process of deploying the cord illustrated in FIG. 4B , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 4D illustrates the strap of FIG. 4C folded over into the loop configuration, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 5A illustrates an end user using an electronic device and a cord with magnetic beads, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 5B illustrates using the magnetic beads to secure speaker cords of the cord of FIG. 5A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 5C illustrates the end user using the electronic device and the cord with magnetic beads when the cord is fully-deployed, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 5D illustrates using the magnetic beads to secure speaker cords of the cord of FIG. 5C , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 6A illustrates a top view of a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 6B illustrates a perspective view of the magnetic strap illustrated in FIG. 6A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 6C illustrates a side view of the magnetic strap illustrated in FIG. 6A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 7A illustrates a top view of a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 7B illustrates a perspective view of the magnetic strap illustrated in FIG. 7A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 7C illustrates a side view of the magnetic strap illustrated in FIG. 7A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 8A illustrates a top view of a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 8B illustrates a perspective view of the magnetic strap illustrated in FIG. 8A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 8C illustrates a side view of the magnetic strap illustrated in FIG. 8A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 8D illustrates a shape of the magnets of the magnetic strap illustrated in FIG. 8A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 8E illustrates another shape of the magnets of the magnetic strap illustrated in FIG. 8A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 9A illustrates a top view of a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 9B illustrates a perspective view of the magnetic strap illustrated in FIG. 9A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 9C illustrates a side view of the magnetic strap illustrated in FIG. 9A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 10A illustrates a cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 10B illustrates another cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 10C illustrates another cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 10D illustrates another cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 10E illustrates another cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 11A illustrates a side view of a grommet for a cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 11B illustrates a perspective view of a grommet for a cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 11C illustrates another grommet for a cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 12A illustrates a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 12B illustrates another magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 12C illustrates another magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 12D illustrates another magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 12E illustrates another magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 12F illustrates another magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 13A illustrates a top view of a magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 13B illustrates a side view of the magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 13C illustrates a cross-section view of the magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 13D illustrates another cross-section view of the magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 14A illustrates a magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 14B illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 14C illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 14D illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 14E illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 14F illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 14G illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 14H illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 14J illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 14K illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 15A illustrates a process of attaching a magnetic bead to a cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 15B illustrates the magnetic bead of FIG. 15A attached to the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 15C illustrates another magnetic bead that is attached to the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 15D illustrates several magnetic beads that are attached to the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 15E illustrates a process of attaching a connector for the cord to a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 15F illustrates the connector of FIG. 15E attached to the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 15G illustrates a magnetic material attached to an object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 15H illustrates an assembled cord managements system, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 15J illustrates views of the magnetic material, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 16A illustrates a magnetic strap attached to an object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 16B illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 16A folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 17A illustrates a magnetic strap attached to an object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 17B illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 17A folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 18A illustrates a magnetic strap integrated into a case for an object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 18B illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 18A folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 19A illustrates a case for an object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 19B illustrates a magnetic strap attached to the case illustrated in FIG. 19A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 19C illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 19B folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 19D illustrates a cord wrapped around the magnetic strap and the object of FIG. 19B , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 19E illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 19D folded over to form a loop around the cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 19F illustrates the strap securing the cord detached from the object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 20A illustrates a process for managing a cord, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 20B continues the process illustrated in FIG. 20A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 20C continues the process illustrated in FIG. 20B , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 20D continues the process illustrated in FIG. 20C , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 20E continues the process illustrated in FIG. 20D , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 21A illustrates a process for deploying a cord wrapped around a device, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 21B continues the process illustrated in FIG. 21A , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 21C continues the process illustrated in FIG. 21B , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a method for using a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a method for configuring a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating a computer system for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 26A illustrates an object and a cord secured by a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 26B illustrates the magnetic strap attached to the object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 26C illustrates the magnetic strap attached to the object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 27A illustrates a magnetic strap attached to an object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 27B illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 27A folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 27C illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 27A rotated 90 degrees, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 27D illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 27C folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 27E illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 27A attached to a top surface of the object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 27F illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 27E folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 27G illustrates the magnetic strap securing a cord and attached to the object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 28A illustrates a magnetic strap attached to an object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 28B illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 28A folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 28C illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 278 rotated 90 degrees, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 28D illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 28C folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 28E illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 28A attached to a top surface of the object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 28F illustrates the magnetic strap of FIG. 28E folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 28G illustrates the magnetic strap securing a cord and attached to the object, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 29A illustrates a case with an integrated strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 29B illustrates another case with an integrated strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 29C illustrates another case with an integrated strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 29D illustrates a case with a strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 29E illustrates another case with a strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 29F illustrates a top view of a case, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 29G illustrates a back view of a case, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 29H illustrates a close up perspective view of a portion of a case, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 29I illustrates an integrated strap folded into a loop and securing a cord wrapped around a case, according to some embodiments.
- FIGS. 30A-30I illustrate embodiments of cases similar to those in FIGS. 29A-29I .
- FIG. 31A illustrates a case with a semi-permanently attached strap with the strap detached, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 31B illustrates a case with a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 31C illustrates another case with a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 31D illustrates another case with a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 31E illustrates another case with a semi-permanently attached strap with the strap detached, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 31F illustrates a case with a non-magnetic attachment area, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 31G illustrates another case with a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 31H illustrates a case with a cavity, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 31I illustrates a case with a cavity and a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 31J illustrates a case without a cavity, with a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIGS. 32A-32J illustrate embodiments of cases similar to those in FIGS. 31A-31J .
- FIG. 33A illustrates a case with a magnetic material back, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33B illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and a strap attached to a location on the case, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33C illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and a strap attached to another location on the case, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33D illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and a strap attached to another location on the case, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33E illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and another strap, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33F illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and a strap folded into a loop and securing a cord wrapped around a case, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33G illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and a strap folded into a loop and securing a cord wrapped in a loop, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33H illustrates a case with an encapsulated magnetic material back, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33I illustrates a case with a magnetic material back to be inserted into a pocket in the case, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33J illustrates a case with a magnetic material back having distinct portions, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33K illustrates a case with a magnetic material back, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 33L illustrates an exploded perspective view of a case with a magnetic material back, according to some embodiments.
- FIGS. 34A-34L illustrate embodiments of cases similar to those in FIGS. 3A-33L .
- FIG. 35 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 36 is a flowchart of method for manufacturing another cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 37 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing another cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 38 illustrates a case including color-changing material on a portion of the case, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 39 illustrates a case with a thermochromic material, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 40 illustrates a case with a design incorporating thermochromic materials, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 41 illustrates a case where portions of the case include thermochromic materials, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 42 illustrates a case with a design incorporating thermochromic materials, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 43 illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of a case, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 44A illustrates a case with a thermochromic sheet, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 44B illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of a thermochromic sheet, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 45 is a flowchart of another method for manufacturing a case with a color-changing material, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing a case with a color-changing material, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing a case with a thermochromic material, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a method of using a case that includes a color-changing material.
- FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheeting with a color-changing material, according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 1 illustrates components of an exemplary cord management system 100 .
- the components of the cord management system 100 may include a magnetic strap 101 , one or more magnetic beads 102 , and a magnetic material 103 .
- the magnetic strap 101 is described in more detail with respect to FIG. 6-12 below
- the magnetic beads 102 are described in more detail with respect to FIG. 13-14 below.
- the magnetic material 103 is described in more detail with respect to FIG. 15G below.
- the cord management system 100 is provided to an end user as a kit that includes components that the end user assembles to form the cord management system. The process of assembling the cord management system 100 is described in more detail with respect to FIG. 15 below.
- the kit includes a subset of the components illustrated in FIG. 1 .
- the cord management system 100 may include: (1) the magnetic strap 101 , (2) the magnetic strap 101 and the magnetic beads 102 , (3) the magnetic strap 101 and the magnetic material 103 , (4) the magnetic strap 101 , the magnetic beads 102 , and the magnetic material 103 , or (5) the magnetic beads 102 .
- only a subset of the cord management system 100 is used to secure a cord and prevent the cord from becoming tangled.
- the end user may choose one of several options to secure the cord using: (1) the magnetic strap 101 , (2) the magnetic strap 101 and the magnetic beads 102 , (3) the magnetic strap 101 and the magnetic material 103 , (4) the magnetic strap 101 , the magnetic beads 102 , and the magnetic material 103 , or (5) the magnetic beads 102 . These options are described below.
- a magnet may be considered a magnetic material, a magnetic material is not necessarily a magnet.
- a magnetic material is a material or composition that produces a magnetic field in response to an applied magnetic field (e.g., a magnetic field produced by a magnet).
- the magnetic material may include one or more of a ferromagnetic material and a paramagnetic material.
- the end user uses the magnetic strap 101 to secure a cord.
- a cord 201 is wrapped around the magnetic strap 101 substantially perpendicular to and/or otherwise across the magnetic strap 101 at any angle.
- the cord 201 is a cord for earphones.
- the term “earphones” is used in this specification to refer to any device (e.g., headphones, ear buds, etc.) that an end user places on or in the ears to produce sounds.
- the cord 201 may include speakers (e.g., ear buds) 202 and 203 , as illustrated in FIGS. 2A-2E .
- the magnetic strap 101 is placed on an object and the cord 201 is wrapped around both the object and the magnetic strap 101 in a direction substantially perpendicular to and/or across the length of the magnetic strap 101 .
- the object may be an electronic device 210 , as illustrated in FIGS. 2A-2C .
- the object may be a hand as illustrated in FIG. 2D-2E .
- the magnetic strap 101 is folded over to form a loop around the cord 201 to secure the cord 201 to the magnetic strap 101 .
- FIG. 2B e.g., an electronic device
- FIG. 2D e.g., a hand
- the magnetic strap 101 can be removed from the object and stored in a pocket, a bag, or a purse without the cord 201 becoming tangled or without the cord 201 becoming unwound from the magnetic strap 101 .
- FIGS. 2B and 2D illustrate a cord that is completely secured by the magnetic strap 101
- the end user may choose to wrap only a portion of the cord 201 in the magnetic strap 101 .
- FIG. 2G illustrates an end user 230 that is holding the electric device 210 with the speakers 202 and 203 inserted in his ears.
- the cord 201 is wound around the electronic device 210 and the magnetic strap 101 several times and is secured with the magnetic strap 101 .
- the end user 230 has reduced the length of the cord 201 that is free and dangling.
- the length of the cord 201 is such that the end user 230 can perform desired functions and move the electronic device 210 without dislodging the speakers 202 and 203 and without having too much slack on the cord 201 .
- magnets located at magnetic attachment points 104 and 105 on the magnetic strap 101 keep the magnetic strap 101 in the loop configuration when the magnetic strap 101 is folded over to form the loop.
- the magnetic attachment points 104 and 105 may be replaced with other types of attachment mechanisms.
- the attachment mechanism may include Velcro, adhesives, suction devices (e.g., suction cups), van der Waals force attachment mechanisms (e.g., “Gecko” tape), snaps, buttons, friction mechanisms, buckles, springs, bistable springs (e.g., a slap bracelet), a sleeve that inserts into a slot, a peg that is inserted into a hole, and hinges.
- the end user may desire to remove the cord 201 from an electronic device onto which the cord 201 is attached and store the cord 201 separately from the electronic device. In these cases, it is highly desirable to prevent the separated cord 201 from becoming tangled.
- the magnetic strap 101 is removed from the object. These embodiments are illustrated in FIGS. 2C and 2F . Since the cord 201 is secured to the magnetic strap 101 , removing the magnetic strap 101 from the object removes the cord 201 from the object. When the magnetic strap 101 is removed from the object, the cord 201 remains looped around the magnetic strap 101 . Thus, the cord 201 that is wrapped around the magnetic strap 101 does not become tangled when placed in a pocket, a bag, or a purse.
- the end user may wish to use the electronic device again.
- the cord 201 is secured by the magnetic strap 101 .
- the cord 201 is deployed from the magnetic strap 101 by pulling the end of the cord 201 in a direction substantially parallel to the length of the magnetic strap.
- FIGS. 2H , 2 J, and 2 K illustrate the deployment of the cord 201 when the cord 201 is wrapped around the electronic device 210 . As illustrated in FIG.
- the end user pulls on the speakers 202 and 203 in a direction substantially parallel to the length of the magnetic strap 101 .
- the force that the end user exerts on the cord 201 causes the magnetic strap 101 to detach from the loop and become open.
- the cord 201 unwinds from the electronic device 210 , as illustrated in FIG. 2K .
- the user may stop unwinding the cord 201 from the electronic device at any time. For example, user may partially deploy the cord 201 and secure the cord 201 using the magnetic strap 101 as illustrated in FIG. 5A .
- the magnetic strap 101 is used to secure one or more of: drapery, drapery cords, power cords, extension cords, hoses, ropes, kite strings, fishing lines, and the like.
- the cord management system includes the magnetic strap 101 and one or more of the magnetic beads 102 .
- the magnetic beads 102 may be used for several purposes. In some embodiments, the magnetic beads 102 are used to assist in the wrapping of the cord 201 around the electronic device 210 and the magnetic strap 101 . In some embodiments, the magnetic beads 102 are used to keep the speakers 202 and 203 coupled to each other when the cord 201 is wrapped around the electronic device 210 . In some embodiments, the magnetic beads 102 are used to secure the speakers 202 and 203 to a predetermined point on the cord 201 . In some embodiments, the magnetic beads 102 are used to secure excess cord after the cord 201 is wrapped around the electronic device 210 . In some embodiments, the magnetic beads 102 are used to secure the cord under the chin of an end user. These embodiments are described below.
- FIGS. 3A to 3E illustrates a process for managing a cord using the magnetic strap 101 and the magnetic beads 102 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic beads 102 may include one or more of magnetic beads 301 , 302 , 303 , and 304 , each having an embedded magnet, as described below.
- at least a subset of the magnetic beads 301 , 302 , 303 , and 304 may be substituted for a magnetic material that is embedded in the magnetic beads 301 , 302 , 303 , and 304 .
- additional magnetic beads, above and beyond the magnetic beads 301 , 302 , 303 , and 304 may be included in the cord management system 100 . Among other things, these additional magnetic beads may be used as replacements for lost magnetic beads.
- a connector 204 of the cord 201 (and/or the cord 201 ) is inserted into a cord-attachment mechanism 109 of the magnetic strap 101 .
- the term “connector” is used in this specification to refer to any type of connector or plug.
- the connector 204 may be an electrical connector (e.g., an audio connector, a video connector, a power connector, a computer connector, etc.) or non-electrical connector.
- the connector 204 of the cord 201 is then attached to a corresponding connector 211 on the electronic device 210 .
- the magnetic strap 101 is then placed on the electronic device 210 so that the length of the magnetic strap 101 is collinear with the direction in which the connector 204 of the cord was inserted into the corresponding connector 211 on the electronic device 210 .
- the corresponding connector 211 on the electronic device 210 is located at a top edge of the electronic device 210 .
- the length of the magnetic strap 101 is parallel to the length of the electronic device 210 . If, however, the corresponding connector 211 of the electronic device 210 were located at a side edge of the electronic device 210 , the length of the magnetic strap 101 may run in a direction perpendicular to the direction illustrated in FIG. 3A or at another angle other than the angle illustrated in FIG. 3A .
- a magnetic bead 301 is attached to the cord 201 at a predetermined location on the cord 201 .
- the predetermined location is selected so that when the cord 201 is bent towards the magnetic attachment point 104 , the magnetic bead 301 becomes magnetically attached to the magnetic strap 101 at the magnetic attachment point 104 .
- the term “magnetically attached” is defined below.
- the magnetic bead 301 allows the end user to start wrapping the cord 201 around the electronic device and the magnetic strap 101 without needing to hold the cord 201 onto the magnetic strap 101 or the electronic device 210 , as illustrated in FIG. 3B . Note that these embodiments are optional.
- 3B-3E illustrate the magnetic bead 301 attached to the cord 201 , the magnetic bead 301 may be omitted.
- an experienced end user may be able to start wrapping the cord 201 around the magnetic strap 101 and the electronic device 210 without the aid of the magnetic bead 301 and without needing to hold the cord 201 onto the magnetic strap 101 or the electronic device 210 .
- the cord 201 is then wrapped around the magnetic strap 101 and the electronic device 210 , as illustrated in FIGS. 3C-3E .
- the cord 201 is wrapped around the magnetic strap 101 substantially perpendicular to a length of the magnetic strap 101 . Note that if the length of the magnetic strap 101 runs in a direction perpendicular to the direction or at an angle other than the angle illustrated in FIGS. 3A-3E , the cord 201 is wrapped around the length of the electronic device 210 so that the cord 201 is substantially perpendicular to the magnetic strap 101 .
- FIG. 3D illustrates the cord 201 after it has been wrapped around the electronic device 210 .
- magnetic beads 302 and 303 are attached on the cords for the speakers 202 and 203 at a predetermined distance from the speakers 202 and 203 .
- one of the magnets 302 and 303 is substituted for magnetic material.
- the magnets of the speakers 202 and 203 are used in lieu of the magnets 302 and 303 .
- the magnetic beads 302 and 303 are magnetically attached to each other so that the speakers 202 and 203 are coupled to each other.
- the cord for each of the speakers 202 and 203 has a reduced likelihood of becoming tangled with each other or with other parts of the cord 201 .
- the predetermined distance may be selected so that the magnetic beads 302 and 303 are located on the cords just below the speakers 202 and 203 , as illustrated in FIG. 3D .
- FIG. 3E after the magnetic strap 101 is folded over to form the loop, the free end of the cord 201 (i.e., the end attached to the speakers 202 and 203 ) may be allowed to dangle freely. As illustrated in FIG.
- the free end of the cord 201 may be folded over so that the magnetic beads 302 and 303 are magnetically attached to the magnetic attachment point 105 . As illustrated in FIG. 3F , the speakers 202 and 203 no longer dangle.
- the cord 201 may become caught on other objects (such as when placed in a pocket, a bag, or a purse).
- the final wrap of the cord 201 may place the speakers 202 and 203 on front side of the electronic device 210 (i.e., the opposite side of the electronic device 210 illustrated in FIG. 3E ).
- a magnetic bead 304 is attached on the cord 201 so that when the cord 201 is wrapped around the electronic device 210 , the magnetic bead 304 is located on the front side of the electronic device 210 .
- FIG. 3G These embodiments are illustrated in FIG. 3G .
- the magnetic beads 302 and 303 are then magnetically attached to the magnetic bead 304 .
- the end user may slide and/or otherwise readjust the magnetic beads 302 and 303 up and down the cord 201 so that the magnetic beads 302 , 303 , and 304 can be magnetically attached to each other.
- the speakers 202 and 203 may still dangle, the amount of the cord 201 that is dangling can be reduced.
- the end user may not wish to fold over the cord 201 to secure the free end of the cord 201 (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 3F ).
- the magnetic bead 304 may be attached on the cord 201 so that when the cord 201 is wrapped around the electronic device 210 , the magnetic bead 304 is located on the back side of the electronic device 210 , as illustrated in FIG. 3H .
- the magnetic beads 302 and 303 are then magnetically attached to the magnetic bead 304 .
- the end user may slide the magnetic beads 302 and 303 up and down the cord 201 so that the magnetic beads 302 , 303 , and 304 can be magnetically attached to each other.
- the speakers 202 and 203 may still dangle, the amount of the cord 201 that is dangling can be reduced.
- the end user may not wish to use the magnetic strap 101 to secure the cord.
- the end user may magnetically attach the magnetic beads 302 and 303 to magnetic material that is attached to the electronic device 210 .
- the use of magnetic material in conjunction with the electronic device 210 is described in more detail below.
- the end user slides the magnetic beads 302 and 304 so that free end of the cord 201 does not slide back through the loop (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 3J ).
- the end user wraps a portion of the free end of the cord 201 over itself (e.g., in a shape of a bow tie, as illustrated in FIG. 3K ) so that the amount of the cord 201 that is left dangling is reduced. The end user then secures the wrapped portion of the free end of the cord 201 using the magnetic strap 101 as illustrated in FIG. 3K .
- the magnetic strap 101 flips back to the open position (i.e., the magnetic strap 101 lays substantially flat on the electronic device 210 ), as illustrated in FIGS. 2J and 2K .
- FIGS. 20A to 20E illustrate a process for managing a cord, according to some embodiments.
- the process illustrated in FIGS. 20A to 20E is similar to the process illustrated in FIGS. 3A to 3E , except that the magnetic strap 101 is attached to an electronic device 2001 having a different shape and size as compared to the electronic device 210 .
- the connector 2006 is attached to the electronic device 2001 .
- the cord 2005 (e.g., the cord 201 ) is then wrapped around the magnetic strap 101 and the electronic device 2001 , as illustrated in FIGS. 20B-20D .
- the cord 2005 is wrapped around the magnetic strap 101 substantially perpendicular to and/or otherwise across the magnetic strap 101 at any angle.
- the magnetic bead 2013 (e.g., the magnetic bead 301 ) is first magnetically attached to the magnet of the magnetic strap 101 before the cord 2005 is wrapped around the magnetic strap 101 and the electronic device 2001 .
- FIG. 20B These embodiments are illustrated in FIG. 20B .
- FIG. 20D illustrates the cord 2005 after it has been wrapped around the electronic device 2001 .
- the cords for the speakers 2011 and 2012 do not include magnetic beads. Therefore, the speakers 2011 and 2012 are not coupled to each other and hang freely, as illustrated in FIGS. 20D and 20E .
- the magnetic strap 101 is formed into a loop (i.e., the first mode of operation). These embodiments are illustrated in FIGS. 20D , 20 E, and 21 A.
- FIGS. 21A-21C This process for deploying the cord 2005 from the electronic device 2001 is illustrated in FIGS. 21A-21C , according to some embodiments.
- a user grabs the speakers (or the cord 2005 near the speakers) and pulls the cord 2005 in a direction substantially parallel to the length of the magnetic strap 101 .
- the force that the cord 2005 exerts against the magnets at the magnetic attachment points 104 and 105 causes the magnets to be detached from each other, as illustrated in FIG. 21B .
- FIG. 21C the cord 2005 is fully deployed from the magnetic strap 101 .
- a wrapped cord is deployed from the magnetic strap 101 by pulling on the cord in a direction not parallel to the length of the magnetic strap 101 .
- a user may deploy a wrapped cord by pulling in a direction perpendicular to the length of the magnetic strap.
- the user may also pull the magnetic attachment points 104 and 105 away from each other by pulling on the strap directly.
- the magnetic beads 302 and 303 are used to secure the cord 201 when the cord 201 is deployed.
- FIG. 5A illustrates an end user 501 using the cord 201 with the electronic device 210 , according to some embodiments.
- the cord 201 includes a cord segment 204 coupled to the speaker 202 and a cord segment 205 coupled to the speaker 203 .
- cord segments 204 and 205 may also be referred to as speaker cords.
- the cord segments 204 and 205 are coupled to the cord 201 at point 206 .
- the cord segments 204 and 205 may dangle loosely.
- the cord segments 204 and 205 may swing around and get caught in clothing and/or become dislodged from the ears of end user 501 .
- the magnetic beads 302 and 303 are moved to a position below the chin of the end user 501 and are magnetically coupled to each other, as illustrated in FIG. 5B .
- the end user 501 may slide the magnetic beads 302 and 303 up and down the cord segments 204 and 205 to adjust the amount of the cord segments 204 and 205 that are unsecured.
- FIGS. 5A and 5B illustrate a partially-deployed cord 201
- the cord 201 may also be fully-deployed.
- the fully-deployed cord is illustrated in FIGS. 5C and 5D , which are analogous to FIGS. 5A and 5B , respectively.
- At least one of the magnetic beads 301 , 302 , 303 , and 304 include a clip that allows the magnetic bead to be clipped onto an object.
- the object may be clothing (e.g., a shirt, a pants pocket, etc.) or a purse strap.
- the magnetic material 103 is attached to the back of the electronic device 210 so that when the magnetic strap 101 is in the open position, the magnetic attachment point 105 of the magnetic strap 101 is magnetically attached to the magnetic material 103 .
- FIGS. 4A , 4 B, and 4 C These embodiments are illustrated in FIGS. 4A , 4 B, and 4 C.
- FIG. 4A an end user grabs the speakers and pulls the cord 201 in a direction substantially parallel to the length of the magnetic strap 101 .
- the force that the cord 201 exerts against the magnets at the magnetic attachment points 104 and 105 causes the magnets to be detached from each other so that the magnetic strap 101 no longer forms the loop, as illustrated in FIG. 4B .
- the force that the cord 201 exerts against the magnets causes the magnetic strap 101 to return to its natural configuration (e.g., the flat configuration).
- the magnetic strap 101 is also magnetically attracted to the magnetic material 103 , thereby assisting in the deployment of the magnetic strap 101 .
- the magnetic force between the magnetic attachment point 105 of the magnetic strap 101 and the magnetic material 103 pulls the magnetic attachment point 105 towards the magnetic material 103 .
- the magnetic material 103 also holds the magnetic strap 101 to the electronic device 210 so that the strap does not move while in the open position.
- the cord 201 is fully deployed from the magnetic strap 101 . After the cord 201 is fully deployed, the end user may fold the strap over, as illustrated in FIG. 4D .
- the magnetic material 103 is attached to the electronic device 210 so that when the magnetic strap 101 is in the open position, the magnetic attachment point 104 of the magnetic strap 101 is magnetically attached to the magnetic material 103 .
- These embodiments are used to attach the magnetic strap 101 to the electronic device 210 when the magnetic strap 101 is folded into the loop configuration.
- the magnetic material may be attached to the electronic device 210 using adhesives, suction devices (e.g., suction cups), Velcro, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms (e.g., “Gecko” tape), snaps, buttons, and the like. Also note that the magnetic material may be molded into the electronic device 210 , a back panel of the electronic device 210 , and/or a case for the electronic device 210 .
- the magnetic material may be substituted for an adhesive applied to either or both of the electronic device 210 and/or the magnetic strap 101 , suction devices (e.g., suction cups) attached to either or both of the electronic device 210 and/or the magnetic strap 101 , Velcro attached to both the electronic device 210 and the magnetic strap 101 , van der Waals force attachment mechanisms (e.g., “Gecko” tape) attached to either or both of the electronic device 210 and/or the magnetic strap 101 , snaps attached to either or both of the electronic device 210 and/or the magnetic strap 101 , buttons attached to either or both of the electronic device 210 and/or the magnetic strap 101 , and hinges attached to either or both of the electronic device 210 and/or the magnetic strap 101 .
- suction devices e.g., suction cups
- Velcro attached to both the electronic device 210 and the magnetic strap 101
- van der Waals force attachment mechanisms e.g., “Gecko” tape
- the cord management system 100 includes the magnetic strap 101 , the magnetic beads 102 , and the magnetic material 103 .
- the various embodiments described above may be used in combination to secure the cord 201 .
- magnetic strap 101 The design and the composition of magnetic strap 101 , the magnetic beads 102 , and the magnetic material 103 are described in more detail below.
- the cord management system 100 includes the magnetic beads 102 .
- the magnetic beads are attached to the cord 201 at locations so that when the cord 201 is wrapped around an object (e.g., the electronic device 210 ), two or more magnetic beads at different locations on the cord 201 are magnetically attached to each other so that the cord 201 cannot become unwrapped from the object.
- FIG. 3G illustrates magnetic beads 302 , 303 , and 304 (all of which are located at different locations on the cord 201 ) are magnetically attached to each other.
- FIGS. 6A , 6 B, and 6 C illustrate top, perspective and side views, respectively, of a magnetic strap 601 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic strap 601 is one particular embodiment of the magnetic strap 101 described above.
- the magnetic strap 601 includes a magnet 602 at a location 604 on the magnetic strap 601 and a magnet 603 at a location 605 on the magnetic strap 601 .
- the magnets 602 and 603 may include any element or composition that is capable of producing a magnetic field.
- the magnets 602 and 603 may include one or more of magnetic metallic elements (e.g., iron, cobalt, nickel, etc.), composite magnets (e.g., ceramic or ferrite magnets, alnico magnets, ticonal magnets, injection molded magnets, flexible magnets), rare earth magnets (e.g., samarium-cobalt magnets, neodymium-iron-boron magnets, etc.), electromagnets, sets of any of these magnets, or any material or composition that produces a magnetic field.
- the magnets 602 and 603 are Neodymium magnets.
- the Neodymium magnets are a grade N42.
- the magnetic strap 601 includes only one magnet and a magnetic material.
- the magnetic strap 601 may include the magnet 602 at the location 604 and a magnetic material at the location 605 .
- the magnetic strap 601 may include a magnetic material at the location 604 and the magnet 603 at the location 605 .
- a magnetic material is a material or composition that produces a magnetic field in response to an applied magnetic field.
- the magnetic material may include one or more of a ferromagnetic material and a paramagnetic material.
- the magnetic material is low-carbon steel.
- this specification refers to the magnets 602 and 603 as “magnets” even though one of the magnets 602 and 603 may be a magnetic material.
- any combination of magnets and magnetic material that allows for the magnetic attachments described herein to function may be used.
- the magnets 602 and 603 are solid magnets. In some embodiments, the magnets 602 and 603 are selected from the group consisting of donut (ring) magnets, horseshoe-shaped (U-shaped) magnets, cylindrical magnets, disc-shaped magnets, rectangular magnets, and the like. In some embodiments, the magnets 602 and 603 are sets of magnets. The selection of the size and shape of the magnets 602 and 603 may depend on factors including, but not limited to, a desired magnetic strength, a desired form factor, a desired aesthetic, and the manufacturing process used to produce the magnetic strap 601 .
- the magnets 602 and 603 are embedded in the magnetic strap 601 .
- the magnets 602 and 603 are either enclosed or partially enclosed by the material that forms the magnetic strap 601 .
- the material that forms the magnetic strap 601 forms a gradual contour around the magnets 602 and 603 .
- the contour formed by the material of the magnetic strap 601 around the magnets 602 and 603 may conform to the shape of the magnetic strap 601 .
- the material enclosing the magnets 602 and 603 forms a rectangular region.
- This rectangular region serves at least two purposes: to hold the magnets 602 and 603 in place and to provide a flat surface onto which the magnets 602 and 603 can be magnetically attached to each other.
- the flat surface allows the magnets 602 and 603 to be magnetically attached to each other better than a surface that is not flat (e.g., a crowned surface).
- the magnets 602 and 603 are configured so that opposite magnetic poles of each magnet are perpendicular to the top (or bottom) surface of the magnetic strap 601 .
- the north pole of the magnet 602 is configured to be perpendicular to a first surface of the magnetic strap 601 whereas the south pole of the magnet 603 is configured to be perpendicular to the first surface of the magnetic strap 601 .
- only one of the magnets 602 and 603 is a magnet and the other magnet is a magnetic material. Again, any combination of magnets and magnetic material that allows for the magnetic attachments described herein to function may be used.
- the magnetic strap 601 includes a segment 606 that is located between the magnets 602 and 603 .
- the segment 606 also includes the portion of the magnetic strap 601 that includes the magnets 602 and 603 .
- the segment 606 is composed of a material that is substantially memoryless.
- the memoryless material is an elastic polymer.
- a material that is memoryless is a material that does not exhibit elastic hysteresis, which causes a material to behave differently when a loading force that was exerted on the material is removed.
- the segment 606 is composed of a memoryless material that causes the magnetic strap 601 to return to a substantially flat configuration when unloaded (or when the loading force is less than a restoring force of the memoryless material). These embodiments are illustrated in FIGS. 6A-6C . Note that when an external force is applied to the memoryless material, the memoryless material generates a restoring force that opposes the external force.
- the restoring force tries to keep the memoryless material in its natural configuration (e.g., a flat configuration). For example, consider the application of an external force to the segment 606 that causes the segment 606 to form a loop. When the external force is removed, the segment 606 returns to its natural configuration (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS. 6A-6C ).
- the restoring force is a function of the displacement (e.g., stretching, bending, etc.) of the memoryless material.
- the external force required to change the configuration of the memoryless material varies as a function of the displacement.
- the segment 606 is composed of a polymer.
- the polymer is selected from the group consisting of silicone and an elastomer (e.g., thermoplastic elastomer).
- the polymer is resistant to dust.
- These polymers may be used in manufacturing processes such as injection molding, casting, compression molding, and die cutting. The type of manufacturing process selected may depend on factors such as a desired manufacturing volume, manufacturing time, and manufacturing costs. Additionally, the type of manufacturing process selected may depend on a desired aesthetic design of the magnetic strap 601 . For example, if the aesthetic design of the magnetic strap 601 requires that the magnets 602 - 603 are to be encapsulated in the material of the magnetic strap 601 , an injection molding process may be used. In some embodiments, a two-shot injection molding process is used to manufacture the magnetic strap 601 .
- the segment 606 is composed of a fabric.
- the fabric may be a Neoprene fabric, leather, silk, cotton, denim, foil, Mylar, and the like.
- the magnetic strap 601 includes a segment 607 .
- the segment 607 includes the portion of the magnetic strap 601 that includes the magnet 603 .
- the segment 607 is composed of an elastic material.
- the elastic polymer may be any of the polymers discussed above with respect to the segment 606 .
- the segment 607 is composed of a fabric (e.g. Neoprene).
- the segment 607 includes a handle 610 .
- the handle 610 is formed from the same material as the segment 607 .
- the handle 610 is a raised portion or high friction of material of the magnetic strap 601 that allows a user to grab onto the end of the magnetic strap 601 while attaching the magnetic strap 601 to a cord (or connector) using the cord-attachment mechanism 609 . Without the handle 610 , the fingers of the end user may slip off of the magnetic strap 601 while attaching the magnetic strap 601 to a cord (and/or a connector of the cord) using the cord-attachment mechanism 609 .
- a high friction surface for the handle 610 may be created
- the magnetic strap 601 includes a segment 608 .
- the segment 608 includes the portion of the magnetic strap 601 that includes the magnet 602 .
- the segment 608 is composed of an elastic material.
- the elastic material is an elastic polymer.
- the elastic polymer may be any of the polymers discussed above with respect to the segment 606 .
- the segment 608 is composed of a fabric (e.g., Neoprene).
- the segments 606 , 607 , and 608 are composed of the same polymer. In some embodiments, the segments 606 , 607 , and 608 are composed of different, but compatible, polymers. In some embodiments, the segment 608 is composed of a fabric.
- the segment 607 includes a cord-attachment mechanism 609 that is used to attach the magnetic strap 601 to a cord (and/or a connector of the cord).
- the cord-attachment mechanism is described in more detail below with respect to FIGS. 10 and 11 .
- the magnetic strap 601 operates in at least two modes of operation, as described above.
- a first mode of operation the magnets 602 and 603 are magnetically attached to each other so that the segment 606 of the magnetic strap 601 located between the magnets 602 and 603 forms a loop configured to secure a cord that is wrapped around the magnetic strap 601 (e.g., see FIG. 2B ).
- the attractive magnetic force between the magnets 602 and 603 is greater than any restoring force exerted by the material of the magnetic strap 601 that causes the magnetic strap 601 to return to its natural configuration (e.g., flat configuration).
- the segment 606 remains in a loop until an external force is applied to the segment 606 that causes the magnets 602 and 603 to be magnetically detached and/or otherwise separated from each other.
- the magnets 602 and 603 are magnetically detached and/or otherwise separated from each other (e.g., the magnets 602 and 603 are no longer attached to each other).
- the magnetic strap 601 may be substantially flat (e.g., see FIGS. 6A , 6 B, and 6 C).
- the term “magnetically attached,” when applied to two magnets, refers to two magnets being attached to each other by an attractive magnetic force between the two magnets.
- the term “magnetically detached,” when applied to two magnets refers to two magnets that are no longer attached to each other. Although the two magnets may no longer be magnetically attached to each other, the two magnets may still be “magnetically coupled” to each other. In other words, each magnet may feel a magnetic force generated by the magnetic field of the other magnet. This magnetic force is a function of the distance between the two magnets.
- the strength of the magnets 602 and 603 are selected so that the magnetic force between the magnets 602 and 603 is greater than any restoring force exerted by the material of the magnetic strap only when the magnets 602 and 603 are a predefined distance from each other.
- the magnetic force between the magnets 602 and 603 is less than the restoring force exerted by the material.
- the magnetic strap 601 returns to its natural configuration (e.g., the flat configuration illustrated in FIGS. 6A-6C ).
- the magnets 602 and 603 are at a distance less than or equal to the predefined distance from each other, the magnetic force between the magnets 602 and 603 exceeds the restoring force exerted by the material. Thus, the magnets 602 and 603 are drawn to each other and become magnetically attached to each other.
- this specification refers to two magnets (or magnets and magnetic materials) being “magnetically attached” to each other even if the magnets are separated by intermediary materials.
- the material of the magnetic strap 601 e.g., an elastic polymer
- the magnets 602 and 603 are magnetically attached to each other when the surface(s) of material enclosing the magnets 602 and 603 touch each other.
- the second mode of operation is used when deploying (e.g., unwrapping) a cord that is wrapped around the magnetic strap 601 .
- deploying e.g., unwrapping
- FIGS. 2H-2K discussed above with respect to FIGS. 2H-2K .
- the second mode of operation is used when wrapping a cord around the magnetic strap 601 .
- the cord is wrapped substantially perpendicular to and/or otherwise across the magnetic strap 601 at any angle (e.g., see FIGS. 2A-2B ).
- the second mode of operation is used when a user uses the cord.
- the cord is a cord for headphones and the magnetic strap 601 is attached to a music player, the user may use the deployed cord to listen to music.
- the length of the segment 607 and the location of the cord-attachment mechanism 609 within the segment 607 are selected so that when the magnetic strap 601 is placed on an object, the segment 606 lies flat on a surface of the object (e.g., a portable electronic device) (e.g., see FIG. 2A ).
- the length of the magnetic strap 601 is selected based on one or more of: a range of lengths of cords that are to be secured using the magnetic strap 601 , a range of thicknesses of cords that are to be secured using the magnetic strap 601 , a number of times the cord will wrap around the magnetic strap 601 , dimensions of objects on which the magnetic strap 601 is to be placed, the location of the magnets 602 and/or 603 , whether a case is used, and a number of times the cord will wrap around the magnetic strap 601 and an object (and a case for the object).
- the minimum length of the magnetic strap 601 is 1.5 inches. In some embodiments, the length of the magnetic strap 601 is between 1.5 inches and 3.19 inches. In some embodiments, the length of the magnetic strap 601 is 3.02 inches.
- the width of the magnetic strap 601 is typically bounded by the minimum manufacturable width of the material used in the magnetic strap 601 .
- the actual width used for the magnetic strap 601 is typically selected to be at least the size (e.g., the diameter) of the magnets 602 and 603 in embodiments in which the magnets are embedded in the magnetic strap 601 .
- the magnetic strap 601 may be narrower than the magnets 602 and 603 .
- the width of the magnetic strap 601 also affects the resistance of the magnetic strap 601 to twisting (or torsional) forces about a longitudinal axis (i.e., the length) of the magnetic strap 601 .
- the magnetic strap 601 has less tendency to twist (e.g., when deploying a cord).
- the width of the magnetic strap 601 is between 0.25 inches and 0.52 inches. In some embodiments, the width of the magnetic strap 601 is 0.51 inches. In some embodiments, the width of the magnetic strap 601 is at least 0.25 inches.
- the thickness of the magnetic strap 601 is typically bounded by the minimum manufacturable thickness of the material used in the magnetic strap 601 .
- the thickness of the magnetic strap 601 also affects the resistance of the magnetic strap 601 to twisting (or torsional) forces about a longitudinal axis (i.e., the length) of the magnetic strap 601 . For example, if the magnetic strap 601 is wider, the magnetic strap 601 has less tendency to twist (e.g., when deploying a cord).
- the thickness of the magnetic strap 601 is between 0.01 inches and 0.19 inches.
- the minimum thickness of the magnetic strap 601 is 0.01 inches.
- the thickness of the magnetic strap 601 in the center of the segment 606 is 0.06 inches.
- the thickness of the magnetic strap 601 enclosing the magnets 602 and 603 is 0.11 inches.
- the strength of the magnets 602 and 603 are selected to provide a predefined attractive magnetic force between the magnets 602 and 603 when the magnet 602 is magnetically attached to the magnet 603 .
- a decoupling force e.g., an external force
- the magnets remains magnetically attached to each other.
- the magnet 602 is magnetically attached to the magnet 603 and a decoupling force that is greater than or equal to the predefined threshold is exerted against the predefined attractive magnetic force between the magnets, the magnets are magnetically detached from each other.
- the predefined threshold is a function of several factors. These factors include the strengths, size, number, shape, and surface area of the magnets 602 and 603 , the material of the magnetic strap 601 , and the type of decoupling force exerted against the magnets 602 and 603 .
- the strengths of the magnets 602 and 603 determine the strength of the attractive magnetic force between the magnets 602 and 603 . As described above, the strength of the attractive magnetic force between the magnets 602 and 603 is a function of the distance between the magnets 602 and 603 . Thus, the closer the magnets 602 and 603 are to each other, the stronger the attractive magnetic force.
- the material of the magnetic strap 601 , the material of the cord wrapped within the magnetic strap 601 , the length of the cord, the diameter of the cord, and the number of loops of the cord that are wrapped within the magnetic strap 601 , and the thickness of the magnetic strap 601 determine the magnitude of the restoring force.
- the magnitude of the restoring force may be a function of the displacement of the material.
- the restoring force may be greater when the material of the magnetic strap is folded over so that the magnets 602 and 603 are magnetically attached to each other than if the material were only bent slightly.
- the type of decoupling force exerted against the magnets 602 and 603 may include an impulse force (or a force applied during a short but finite time interval) and a continuous force that is either constant or variable.
- the decoupling force required to detach the magnets 602 and 603 so that they do not become magnetically attached again is a function of the distance between the magnets 602 and 603 and of the restoring force of the material of the magnetic strap 601 .
- the attractive magnetic force decreases and the decoupling force required is decreased.
- the restoring force of the material of the magnetic strap 601 exceeds the attractive magnetic force.
- the magnets 602 and 603 while still magnetically coupled to each other, cannot pull the magnets 602 and 603 back together. Accordingly, the decoupling force is no longer necessary because the restoring force of the material of the magnetic strap 601 causes the magnetic strap 601 to return to its natural configuration.
- An example of a decoupling force that is continuously exerted is a force that is generated by a hand that is pulling the magnets 602 and 603 apart from each other.
- the decoupling force required to detach the magnets 602 and 603 so that they do not become magnetically attached again must impart at least enough momentum to the magnets 602 and/or 603 such that distance between the magnets 602 and 603 reaches the predetermined distance at which the restoring force of the material of the magnetic strap 601 exceeds the attractive magnetic force.
- the attractive magnetic force between the magnets 602 and 603 act against the imparted momentum and slows the parting magnets 602 and 603 until the momentum of the magnets 602 and/or 603 reaches zero. Since the magnets 602 and 603 have not reached the predetermined distance by the time the momentum of the magnets 602 and/or 603 reaches zero, the attractive magnetic force pulls the magnets 602 and 603 back toward each other so that they become magnetically attached again.
- An example of a decoupling force that is an impulse is a force generated when a wrapped cord is pulled away from the magnetic strap 601 (e.g., see FIGS. 2H-2K ).
- each of the magnets 602 and 603 are Neodymium donut-shaped magnets having a grade of N42, an outer diameter of 0.375 inches, an inner diameter of 0.125 inches, and a thickness of 0.0625 inches. In some embodiments, the thickness of the magnets 602 and 603 is between 0.0625 inches and 0.2 inches. In some embodiments, the diameter of the magnets 602 and 603 are between 0.3 inches and 0.375 inches. Note that the combination of the grade (i.e., the composition of materials, wherein a higher number for the grade indicates a higher magnetic strength per unit volume), the diameters, the shape, and the thickness of a magnet determines the magnetic strength of the magnet.
- the magnetic strength of a larger magnet may have greater magnetic strength than a smaller magnet with a higher grade.
- Neodymium magnets have the following grades, ordered from lowest to highest strength, N28, N30, N33, N35, N38, N40, N42, N45, N48, N50, and N52.
- a large N28 magnet may be stronger than a small N52 magnet.
- the effective magnetic strength of the magnets may be affected by the properties of the material of the magnetic strap 601 .
- the effective magnetic strength of the magnets 602 and 603 is reduced.
- the magnets 602 and 603 are encapsulated in a material that suppresses or otherwise impedes a portion of the magnetic fields from the magnets 602 and 603 , the effective magnetic strength of the magnets 602 and 603 is reduced.
- the selection of the magnetic strength of the magnets 602 and 603 also depends on the elasticity of the material used for the magnetic strap 601 .
- the restoring force of the elastic material is greater (i.e., the material is more rigid and resists changes to its natural configuration) and stronger magnets are required to hold the magnets 602 and 603 together.
- each of the magnets 602 and 603 are Neodymium step-shaped (e.g., step-layered) magnets.
- the location and the distance of the magnets 602 and 603 on the magnetic strap 601 is determined based at least in part on the length of the strap, the type of objects onto which the magnetic strap is to be used, the elasticity of the material of the magnetic strap 601 , and a length of a cord.
- the minimum distance between the magnets 602 and 603 on the magnetic strap 601 is 0.5 inches.
- the distance between the magnets 602 and 603 is between 0.5 inches to 2.1 inches.
- the distance between the magnets 602 and 603 is 1.38 inches.
- the durometer (i.e., the hardness, also referred to as the “Shore durometer”) of the material of the magnetic strap 601 is at least 10. In some embodiments, the durometer of the material of the magnetic strap 601 in the segments 607 and 608 is 40 and the durometer of the material of the magnetic strap 601 in the segment 606 is 60. In some embodiments, the durometer of the material of the magnetic strap 601 in the segments 607 and 608 is 20 and the durometer of the material of the magnetic strap 601 in the segment 606 is 60. In some embodiments, the durometer of the material of the magnetic strap 601 in the segments 607 and 608 is 20 and the durometer of the material of the magnetic strap 601 in the segment 606 is 40.
- the selection of material for the magnetic strap 601 e.g., the segments 606 - 608
- the selection of the strengths, size, number, the distance between the magnets 602 and 603 , shape, and surface area of the magnets 602 and 603 depends on the aforementioned factors.
- the selection of the materials for the magnetic strap 601 and the strengths of the magnets 602 and 603 are based on factors including the ease of deployment of the cord (e.g., the amount of force required to free the cord from the magnetic strap 601 , etc.) and the prevention of the accidental deployment of the cord (e.g., from jostling in a bag or a purse, a pocket, etc.).
- the location 605 is selected so that when a connector for a cord is inserted into the cord-attachment mechanism 609 and the connector is inserted into an electronic device, the magnetic strap 601 lies substantially flat on the electronic device.
- each of the magnets 602 and 603 may include a set of magnets. Also note that, one of the magnets 602 and 603 may be replaced with a magnetic material, as described above. In some embodiments, the magnet 602 and the magnet 603 are replaced with an attachment mechanism selected from the group consisting of Velcro, adhesives, suction cups, and a van der Waals force attachment mechanism.
- FIGS. 7A , 7 B, and 7 C illustrate top, perspective, and side views, respectively, of a magnetic strap 701 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic strap 701 is similar to the magnetic strap 601 , so only the differences are discussed.
- the magnetic strap 701 includes a magnet 702 at a location 704 on the magnetic strap 701 and a magnet 703 at a location 705 on the magnetic strap 701 .
- the magnetic strap 701 also includes a cord-attachment mechanism 709 .
- the magnets 702 and 703 are embedded in the magnetic strap 701 .
- the magnets 702 and 703 are either enclosed or partially enclosed by the material that forms the magnetic strap 701 .
- the material that forms the magnetic strap 701 forms a gradual contour around the magnets 702 and 703 .
- the contour formed by the material of the magnetic strap 701 around the magnets 702 and 703 may conform to the shape of the magnetic strap 701 .
- the material enclosing the magnets 702 and 703 forms a gradual contour from the center of the magnets 702 and 703 to the center of the segment 706 .
- a crown is formed at the center of the magnets 702 and 703 .
- the crown may be more aesthetically appealing, the crown reduces the surface area on which the magnets 702 and 703 can be magnetically attached to each other such that magnets of greater magnetic strength may be required.
- the magnetic strap 701 includes a segment 706 that is located between the magnets 702 and 703 .
- the segment 706 also includes the portion of the magnetic strap 701 that includes the magnets 702 and 703 .
- the segment 706 is composed of a material that is substantially memoryless, as discussed above with respect to the segment 606 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- the magnetic strap 701 includes a segment 707 .
- the segment 707 includes the portion of the magnetic strap 701 that includes the magnet 703 .
- the segment 707 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to the segment 607 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- the segment 707 is composed of an elastic polymer.
- the magnetic strap 701 includes a segment 708 .
- the segment 708 includes the portion of the magnetic strap 701 that includes the magnet 702 .
- the segment 708 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to the segment 608 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- the segment 708 is composed of an elastic polymer.
- the segment 707 includes a cord-attachment mechanism that is used to attach the magnetic strap 701 to a cord (and/or a connector for the cord), as described above with respect to the cord-attachment mechanism 609 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- FIGS. 8A , 8 B, and 8 C illustrate top, perspective, and side views, respectively, of a magnetic strap 801 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic strap 801 is similar to the magnetic strap 601 , so only the differences are discussed.
- the magnetic strap 801 includes magnets 802 and 804 at a location 806 on the magnetic strap 801 and magnets 803 and 805 at a location 807 on the magnetic strap 801 .
- the magnets 802 - 805 are attached to the surface of the magnetic strap 801 .
- the material of the magnetic strap 801 covers all but one surface of the magnets 802 - 805 (e.g., see FIGS. 8D and 8E ).
- the material of the magnetic strap 801 covers all of the surfaces of the magnets 802 - 805 . Note that although the discussion of the magnetic strap 801 refers to the magnets 802 , 803 , 804 , and 805 , each of the magnets 802 , 803 , 804 , and 805 may include a set of magnets.
- the magnets 802 , 803 , 804 , and 805 are configured so that for a given surface of the magnetic strap 801 , opposite magnetic poles of each magnet on the surface of the magnetic strap 801 are perpendicular to the surface of the magnetic strap 601 .
- the north pole of the magnet 802 is configured to be perpendicular to a top surface of the magnetic strap 801
- the south pole of the magnet 803 is configured to be perpendicular to the top surface of the magnetic strap 801 .
- the south pole of the magnet 804 is configured to be perpendicular to the bottom surface of the magnetic strap 801
- the north pole of the magnet 805 is configured to be perpendicular to the bottom surface of the magnetic strap 801 . Note that the directions of the poles of the magnets may be reversed.
- the magnets 802 and 804 are a single magnet and the magnets 803 and 805 are a single magnet.
- the magnetic strap 801 includes a segment 808 that is located between the magnets 802 and 804 and the magnets 803 and 805 .
- the segment 808 also includes the portion of the magnetic strap 801 that includes the magnets 802 - 805 .
- the segment 808 is composed of a material that is substantially memoryless, as discussed above with respect to the segment 606 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- the magnetic strap 801 includes a segment 809 .
- the segment 809 includes the portion of the magnetic strap 801 that includes the magnets 803 and 805 .
- the segment 809 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to the segment 607 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- the segment 809 is composed of an elastic polymer.
- the magnetic strap 801 includes a segment 811 .
- the segment 811 includes the portion of the magnetic strap 801 that includes the magnets 802 and 804 .
- the segment 811 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to the segment 608 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- the segment 811 is composed of an elastic polymer.
- the cross section of the magnets 802 , 803 , 804 , and 805 are step-shaped (i.e., step-layered). These embodiments are illustrated in FIG. 8D .
- the base of the magnet has protrusions (e.g., protrusions 821 , 822 , 823 , 824 ) that form a step.
- the protrusions of the magnets 802 , 803 , 804 , and 805 may be inserted into corresponding holes (or pockets) in the material so that the magnets 802 , 803 , 804 , and 805 are secured to the magnetic strap 801 .
- the material of the magnetic strap 801 may cover all but one surface of the magnets 802 - 805 .
- the material of the magnetic strap 801 may cover all of the surfaces of the magnets 802 - 805 .
- the magnets 802 and 804 , and 803 and 805 respectively, include posts that are configured to be inserted into each other through the magnetic strap 801 . These embodiments are illustrated in FIG. 8E .
- the magnetic strap 801 has a hole at the locations 806 and 807 into which the posts of the magnets 802 and 804 , and 803 and 805 (e.g., post 831 for the magnet 803 and post 832 for the magnet 805 ) for respectively, are inserted.
- the posts of the magnets 802 and 804 , and 803 and 805 may be configured to be locked to each other after being attached to the magnetic strap 801 .
- the segment 809 includes a cord-attachment mechanism that is used to attach the magnetic strap 801 to a cord (and/or a connector for the cord), as described above with respect to FIGS. 6A-6C .
- FIGS. 9A , 9 B, and 9 C illustrate top, perspective, and side views of a magnetic strap 901 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic strap 901 is similar to the magnetic strap 601 , so only the differences are discussed.
- the magnetic strap 901 includes a magnet 902 at a location 904 on the magnetic strap 901 and a magnet 903 at a location 905 on the magnetic strap 901 .
- the magnets 902 and 903 are either embedded or partially embedded in the magnetic strap 901 .
- the material of the magnetic strap 901 that encloses the magnets 902 and 903 conforms (i.e., fitted) to the shape of the magnets 902 and 903 .
- each of the magnets 902 and 903 may include a set of magnets.
- the magnets 902 and 903 are configured so that opposite magnetic poles of each magnet are perpendicular to the top (or bottom) surface of the magnetic strap 901 .
- the north pole of the magnet 902 is configured to be perpendicular to a first surface of the magnetic strap 901 whereas the south pole of the magnet 903 is configured to be perpendicular to the first surface of the magnetic strap 901 .
- the magnetic strap 901 includes a segment 906 that is located between the magnet 902 and the magnet 903 .
- the segment 906 also includes the portion of the magnetic strap 901 that includes the magnets 902 and 903 .
- the segment 906 is composed of a material that is substantially memoryless, as discussed above with respect to segment 606 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- the magnetic strap 901 includes a segment 907 .
- the segment 907 includes the portion of the magnetic strap 901 that includes the magnet 903 .
- the segment 907 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to the segment 607 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- the segment 907 is composed of an elastic polymer.
- the magnetic strap 901 includes a segment 908 .
- the segment 908 includes the portion of the magnetic strap 901 that includes the magnet 902 .
- the segment 908 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to the segment 608 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- the segment 908 is composed of an elastic polymer.
- the segment 907 includes a cord-attachment mechanism that is used to attach the magnetic strap 901 to a cord (and/or a connector for the cord), as described above with respect to the cord-attachment mechanism 609 in FIGS. 6A-6C .
- the magnetic straps 601 , 701 , 801 , and 901 use magnets and/or a combination of magnets and magnetic material to form a loop that is configured to secure a cord.
- the attachment mechanism is selected from the group consisting of adhesive, Velcro, snaps, buttons, buckles, beads, and van der Waals force attachment mechanisms, suction devices (e.g., suction cups), springs, bistable springs (e.g., a slap bracelet), sleeves that insert into slots, pegs that are inserted into holes, and hinges.
- FIGS. 12A-12F illustrate magnetic straps 1201 - 1206 , respectively, which are alternative designs of the magnetic strap 601 ( 701 , 801 , or 901 ), according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic straps 1201 - 1206 illustrated in these figures differ only in the shapes of the ends of the straps. These alternative designs may also be applied to the magnetic straps 601 , 701 , 801 , and 901 illustrated in FIGS. 6-9 , respectively.
- the thickness of the material of the magnetic strap 601 ( 701 , 801 , or 901 ) from the edge magnets gradually decreases to the thickness of the magnetic strap 601 at the center of the sections 606 , 706 , 808 , or 906 .
- the thickness of the material of the magnetic strap 601 from the edge magnets gradually decreases to the thickness of the magnetic strap 601 a predetermined location in the sections 606 , 706 , 808 , or 906 .
- the thickness of the magnetic strap 601 from the predetermined location in the sections 606 , 706 , 808 , or 906 to the center of the sections 606 , 706 , 808 , or 906 is constant.
- the flexibility of the magnetic strap 601 may be increased or decreased. For example, if the predetermined location is closer to the magnets, the magnetic strap 601 is more flexible because the magnetic strap 601 is thinner in the sections 606 , 706 , 808 , or 906 . However, if the predetermined location is at the center of the sections 606 , 706 , 808 , or 906 , the magnetic strap 601 is less flexible because the magnetic strap 601 is thicker in the sections 606 , 706 , 808 , or 906 .
- the material enclosing the magnets of the magnetic strap 601 forms a substantially flat surface over the top and the bottom of the magnets.
- the substantially flat surface increases the surface area on which the magnets can be magnetically coupled to each other, and in turn, increases the magnetic coupling force between the magnets as compared to a crowned surface (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 7C ).
- the embodiments described herein encapsulate the magnets in the material of the magnetic strap 601 ( 701 , 801 , or 901 ), the magnets may also be attached (e.g., using an adhesive, bolts, rivets, or other attachment mechanisms) onto one or more faces of the magnetic strap 601 (e.g., the “top” side or the “bottom” side of the magnetic strap 601 ).
- the magnetic straps 601 , 701 , 801 , and 901 are symmetrical. In these embodiments, the magnetic straps 601 , 701 , 801 , and 901 may be folded over on either surface to form the loop. In some embodiments, the magnetic straps 601 , 701 , 801 , and 901 are asymmetrical. In these embodiments, the magnetic straps 601 , 701 , 801 , and 901 may only be folded on one of the surfaces to form the loop.
- one surface of the magnetic straps 601 , 701 , 801 , and 901 have a high-friction coating to help hold the wrapped cord in the strap and one surface of the magnetic straps 601 , 701 , 801 , and 901 have a low-friction coating to ease removal of the strap from an object.
- any combination of the features of the magnetic straps described above with respect to FIGS. 6-9 may be used in a particular implementation of a magnetic strap.
- the cord-attachment mechanisms 609 , 709 , 810 , and 909 allow the magnetic straps 601 , 701 , 801 , and 901 , respectively, to be attached to a cord (and/or a connector for the cord).
- cord-attachment mechanisms refers to the cord-attachment mechanism 609
- the embodiments described below may be applied to the cord-attachment mechanisms 709 , 810 , and 909 .
- FIGS. 10 and 11 illustrate exemplary embodiments of the cord-attachment mechanism 609 .
- FIG. 10A illustrates the cord-attachment mechanism 609 as having a plurality of slits 1001 , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 10B illustrates the cord-attachment mechanism 609 as having a single slit 1002 , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 10C illustrates the cord-attachment mechanism 609 as having two slits 1003 configured as an “X” or a “+,” according to some embodiments. Note that the angle between the two slits 1003 may be arbitrarily set.
- FIG. 10E illustrates the cord-attachment mechanism 609 as having slits 1005 in the shape of a star, according to some embodiments.
- the dimensions of the slits 1001 , 1002 , 1003 , and 1005 are selected so that when a cord is inserted into the slits 1001 , 1002 , 1003 , and 1005 , the material around the respective slits applies a pressure against the cord and hold the cord to the magnetic strap 601 . Furthermore, the dimensions of the slits 1001 , 1002 , 1003 , and 1005 are selected so that the cord-attachment mechanism 609 can attach to cords (or connectors of cords) of varying sizes. After the magnetic strap 601 has been attached to the cord (or a connector of the cord), a predetermined elastic force exerted by the hole against the cord secures the magnetic strap 601 to the cord (or the connector of the cord).
- FIG. 10D illustrates the cord-attachment mechanism 609 as a hole 1004 (e.g., a circular hole) in the segment 607 , according to some embodiments.
- a cord or a connector of the cord
- the hole expands as the cord (or the connector for the cord) is inserted into the hole.
- the cord-attachment mechanism 609 is formed from an elastic polymer (e.g., by injecting an elastic polymer into a mold for the magnetic strap 601 or by cutting material from the segment 607 , etc.).
- the elastic polymer may be the elastic polymers described above with respect to the segment 607 .
- the cord-attachment mechanism 609 is composed of the same polymer as the segments 606 , 607 , and 608 . In some embodiments, the cord-attachment mechanism is composed of different, but compatible, polymers. Note that the diameter of the hole 1004 may be determined based on factors including the range of diameters for cords and/or connectors for the cords to be used with the magnetic strap 601 .
- FIGS. 11A and 11B illustrate a side view and a perspective view, respectively, of a grommet 1101 for the cord-attachment mechanism 609 , according to some embodiments.
- the grommet 1101 increases the surface area in contact with a cord (or a connector for the cord) to reduce the tendency of the cord-attachment mechanism 609 to move up and/or down a cord (or a connector for the cord) and to prevent the material in section 607 from forming a cone shape when installing and/or using the magnetic strap 601 .
- the grommet has a height of 0.158 inches. In some embodiments, the grommet has a diameter of 0.1 inches.
- FIG. 11C illustrates another grommet 1102 for the cord-attachment mechanism 609 , according to some embodiments.
- the grommet 1102 includes a centrally-located hole and slits coming out of the hole. The slits allow the grommet 1102 to expand to fit larger diameter cords (or connectors).
- cord-attachment mechanisms may be used instead of the hole.
- Velcro adhesives, magnetic beads, suction devices, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms, buttons, buckles, springs, bistable springs (e.g., a slap bracelet), sleeves that insert into slots, pegs that are inserted into holes, hinges a molded strap with snaps may be used.
- FIGS. 13A and 13B illustrate top and side views, respectively, of a magnetic bead 1301 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic bead 1301 includes a leg 1302 and a leg 1303 that are pivotally coupled to each other at one end of each respective leg.
- Each of the legs 1302 and 1303 also includes a free end.
- the leg 1302 and the leg 1303 are formed from a single piece of material (e.g., a flexible material that allows the legs 1302 and 1303 to bend toward each other).
- the legs 1302 and 1303 may be pivotally coupled to each other using other mechanisms.
- a hinge may be used to couple the leg 1302 to the leg 1303 .
- the magnetic bead 1301 also includes a magnet 1304 attached to the free end of the leg 1302 and a magnet 1305 attached to the free end of the leg 1303 .
- a magnetic material may be substituted for one of the magnets 1304 and 1305 .
- the magnets 1304 and 1305 are embedded into the free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 , respectively.
- the free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 cover all of the surfaces of the magnets 1304 and 1305 .
- the free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 cover all but one surface of the magnets 1304 and 1305 , respectively, as illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B .
- the magnets are selected form the group consisting of magnetic metallic elements, composite magnets, ceramic or ferrite magnets, alnico magnets, ticonal magnets, injection molded magnets, flexible magnets, rare earth magnets, and electromagnets.
- the magnets are Neodymium magnets.
- each magnet is a Neodymium having a grade of N42 a length of 0.27 inches, a width of 0.125 inches, and a thickness of 0.47 inches. Note that the grade and the dimensions of the Neodymium magnet depend on the size of the free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 magnetic beads. For example, a lower grade Neodymium magnet having larger dimensions may be used for a clip that has larger legs.
- the magnetic bead 1301 includes two configurations. In a first configuration, the magnetic bead 1301 is open so that the free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 are not touching each other. In a second configuration, the magnetic bead 1301 is closed so that the free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 are touching each other. When the magnetic bead 1301 is closed, the magnets 1304 and 1305 are magnetically attached to each other and hold the magnetic bead 1301 in the closed configuration. To change the magnetic bead 1301 from the open configuration to the closed configuration, the free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 are bent towards each other.
- the free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 each have at least one substantially flat surface. In these embodiments, when free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 are bent toward each other so that they touch, the substantially flat surfaces of the legs 1302 and 1303 are flush (i.e., there are no gaps) with each other (e.g., see FIGS. 14A to 14K ).
- the magnetic bead 1301 includes a cavity 1306 .
- the cord When attaching the magnetic bead 1301 to a cord, the cord is inserted into the cavity 1306 and the magnetic bead 1301 is closed. Once closed, the magnetic bead 1301 holds the cord until the magnetic bead 1301 is opened.
- the cavity 1306 allows the magnetic bead 1301 to attach to the cord so that the surfaces of the free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 are flush with each other (e.g., see FIGS. 6A to 6J ).
- the cavity 1306 is lined with a high-friction material to make the cavity 1306 more difficult to adjust when the magnetic bead 1301 is attached to a cord.
- the cavity 1306 is lined with a low-friction material to make the cavity 1306 easier to adjust when the magnetic bead 1301 is attached to a cord.
- the cavity 1306 is formed of an elastic material that stretches to accommodate cords of varying sizes.
- the elastic material of the cavity 1306 allows the magnetic bead 1301 to attach to cords of varying sizes so that faces of the free ends of the legs 1302 and 1303 are flush with each other (e.g., see FIGS. 6A to 6J ).
- the elastic material also provides a force against the cord so that the magnetic bead 1301 does not slip along the cord.
- the cavity 1306 is ribbed.
- the attachment mechanism are selected form the group consisting of a snap closure, Velcro, an adhesive, a mechanical bead (e.g., a groove in the side the magnetic bead 1301 that snaps onto the cord), a latch, metal that bends and holds its shape, and the like.
- FIGS. 13C and 13D illustrate cross-section views of the magnetic bead 1301 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnet 1305 is shaped like a step. Specifically, the magnet 1305 includes protrusions 1310 and 1311 that are configured to hold the magnet 1305 in the material of the magnetic bead 1301 .
- the protrusions 1310 and 1311 are located on two opposing sides of the magnet 1305 .
- the protrusions 1310 and 1311 may run the full length or a portion of the length of the side of the magnet 1305 .
- two or more protrusions may be used.
- the magnet 1305 may include protrusions on all of the sides of the magnet 1305 .
- the magnet 1304 may also have the protrusions 1310 and 1311 .
- FIGS. 14A to 14 k illustrate varying dimensions for magnetic beads, according to some embodiments.
- Each of the magnetic beads is attached to a cord for earbuds 601 .
- Each of the magnetic beads 602 , 604 , 606 , 608 , 610 , 612 , 614 , 616 , 618 , and 620 includes a cavity 603 , 605 , 607 , 609 , 611 , 613 , 615 , 617 , 619 , 621 , respectively.
- Table 1 presents exemplary dimensions for each of the magnetic beads illustrated in FIGS. 14A to 14K .
- length refers to the dimension of the magnetic bead (or magnet) along the cord
- width refers to the dimension of the magnetic bead (or magnet) that is perpendicular to the cord
- thickness refers to the thickness of the magnetic bead (or magnet). All dimensions are listed in inches.
- FIG. 14A 14B 14C 14D 14E 14F 14G 14H 14J 14K Folded Length 0.31 0.42 0.56 0.25 0.31 0.42 0.56 0.25 0.31 0.26
- Bead (along Size cord) Width 0.25 0.22 0.20 0.25 0.27 0.24 0.22 0.28 0.25 0.22 ( ⁇ to cord)
- Size (along cord) Width 0.125 0.1 0.08 0.125 0.125 0.1 0.08 0.125 0.125 0.099 ( ⁇ to cord) Thickness 0.047 0.047 0.047 0.063 0.047 0.047 0.047 0.063 0.125 0.099
- the magnetic beads described herein when the magnetic beads described herein are attached to a cord, the magnetic beads can rotate about the cord so that the polarities of the magnets in the magnetic beads can be aligned so that two distinct magnetic beads can magnetically attach to each other.
- a magnetic sheath is used in lieu of or in addition to magnetic beads.
- the magnetic sheath is described in more detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/338,680, entitled “Magnetic Cord Management System,” filed Dec. 18, 2008.
- FIGS. 15A to 15H illustrate the process of configuring a cord management system. These figures illustrate a cord 1515 , which is an audio cord. Note that cords 1513 and 1514 are segments of the cord 1515 (e.g., see FIG. 15D ), and are also audio cords.
- FIG. 15A illustrates a process of attaching a magnetic bead 1520 to the cord 1513 , according to some embodiments.
- the cord 1513 is inserted into a cavity (e.g., the cavity 1306 in FIG. 13A ) of the magnetic bead 1520 .
- the cord 1513 is connected to a speaker 1511 of the headphone.
- the cord 1514 is connected to a speaker 1512 of the headphone.
- the magnetic bead 1520 is attached to the cord 1513 a predetermined distance from the speaker 1511 .
- the magnetic bead 1520 is attached to the cord 1513 (e.g., see FIG. 15B ).
- another magnetic bead is attached to the cord 1514 a predetermined distance from the speaker 1512 , as illustrated in FIG. 15D .
- only one of the two magnetic beads attached to the speakers 1511 and 1512 includes a magnet.
- the other magnetic bead includes a magnetic material.
- a magnetic bead is opened by sliding the magnets of the magnetic bead across each other until the magnets of the magnetic bead are magnetically detached from each other. In some embodiments, a magnetic bead is opened by prying the magnets of the magnetic bead away from each other until the magnets of the magnetic bead are magnetically detached from each other.
- a magnetic bead 1513 is attached to the cord 1515 a predetermined distance from a connector 1516 (e.g., an audio connector). These embodiments are illustrated in FIG. 15C .
- the predetermined distance is selected so that when the connector 1516 is inserted into the cord-attachment mechanism 1509 of the magnetic strap 1501 , the magnetic bead 1523 is configured to be magnetically attached to at least one of the magnets 1502 and 1503 of the magnetic strap 1501 when the cord 1515 is wrapped around the magnetic strap 1501 .
- the magnetic bead 1523 holds the cord 1515 on the magnetic strap 1501 to facilitate winding of the cord around the magnetic strap 1501 .
- a user does not need to hold the cord 1515 to the magnetic strap 1501 while winding the cord 1515 around the magnetic strap 1501 .
- a magnetic bead 1522 is attached to the cord 1513 . These embodiments are illustrated in FIG. 15D .
- the magnetic bead 1522 is attached to the cord 1513 a specified distance from the speaker 1511 .
- the specified distance is selected so that the magnetic bead 1522 can be magnetically attached to one of the magnets of the magnetic strap 1501 when the cord 1513 is wrapped around the magnetic strap 1501 .
- the specified distance is selected so that the magnetic bead 1522 can be magnetically attached to one or more of the magnetic beads 1520 and 1521 when the cord 1513 is wrapped once around an object (e.g., a mobile electronic device).
- a user may wrap the cord 1513 once around the object and attach the magnetic bead 1522 on the cord 1513 at the location where the magnetic beads 1520 and/or 1521 intersect (or overlap) the cord 1513 .
- the connector 1516 is inserted into the cord-attachment mechanism 1509 of the magnetic strap 1501 . These embodiments are illustrated in FIGS. 15E and 15F . By inserting the connector 1516 into the cord-attachment mechanism 1509 , the cord 1515 is secured to the magnetic strap 1501 .
- a magnetic material 1524 (e.g., the magnetic material 103 ) is attached to an object 1530 , as illustrated in FIG. 15G .
- the magnetic material 1524 may be a magnet or magnetic material as discussed above.
- the magnetic material 1524 is attached to the object 1530 at a predetermined location. In some embodiments, the predetermined location is selected so that when the magnetic strap 1501 is attached to the object 1530 , the magnet 1502 is magnetically attached to the magnetic material 1524 .
- These embodiments assist with the deployment of the magnetic strap 1501 and/or may be used to hold the magnetic strap 1501 to the object 1530 when the magnetic strap 1501 is in its natural configuration (e.g., the flat configuration).
- the magnetic strap 1501 is attached so that the cord-attachment mechanism 1509 faces downwards when the electronic device is held in an upright position (e.g., when the user is interacting with the user interface of the electronic device).
- gravity may pull down the end of the magnetic strap 1501 that includes the magnet 1502 .
- the magnetic strap 1501 is in its natural configuration and the magnet 1502 is magnetically attached to the magnetic material 1524 , the end of the magnetic strap 1501 that includes the magnet 1502 will not be pulled down by gravity.
- the predetermined location is selected so that when the magnetic strap 1501 is attached to the object 1530 , the magnet 1503 is magnetically attached to the magnetic material 1524 . These embodiments may be used to hold the magnetic strap 1501 to the object 1530 when the magnetic strap 1501 is folded over into the loop configuration.
- the magnetic material 1524 is selected from the group consisting of a ferromagnetic material and a paramagnetic material. In some embodiments, the magnetic material 1524 is low-carbon steel. In some embodiments, the magnetic material 1524 is Vanadium carbonyl.
- the magnetic material 1524 may be any shape, including, but not limited to, a disc, a square, a rectangle, a decorative shape, and the like. The size and shape of the magnetic material may be selected based on factors including, but not limited to, an aesthetic design of the object onto which the magnetic material is being attached and a width of the magnetic strap. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is a square having 0.5 inches sides. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is a circle having a radius of 0.5 inches.
- the thickness of the magnetic material is 0.006 inches.
- the magnetic material 1524 is beneficial when using the magnetic strap 1501 with an electronic device that has an audio connector port on the side or the bottom of the electronic device. In these cases, the magnetic material 1524 may be used to hold the magnetic strap 1501 to the object. Specifically, the magnetic material 1524 may be used as a magnetic attachment point for the magnet 1502 so that the magnetic strap 1502 does not dangle on the electronic device.
- the magnetic material is galvanized or otherwise coated with a sealant. The sealant may protect against rusting and protects the end users against the sharp edges of the magnetic material.
- FIG. 15J illustrates a top view and a side view of the magnetic material 1524 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic material 1524 includes several elements.
- the magnetic material 1524 includes a disc-shaped magnetic material 1552 (e.g., composed of the magnetic material as described herein) whose outer edge is at least partially covered and/or surrounded by a ring-shaped elastic material 1551 (e.g., an elastic polymer as described herein).
- the ring-shaped elastic material 1551 and/or disc-shaped magnetic material 1552 may be coated with an adhesive (or other attachment mechanism) on one surface to allow the magnetic material 1524 to be attached to the object 1530 .
- the ring-shaped elastic material 1551 is configured to conform to the shape of the object when pressed against the object.
- the disc-shaped material 1552 and/or the magnetic material 1524 may be attached to an intermediate material (e.g., using adhesives and the like) that includes adhesives on one or both surfaces so that the intermediate material may be attached to the object 1530 and to the disc-shaped material 1552 and the magnetic material 1524 .
- the intermediate material may be chosen so that when the intermediate material is pressed onto the object, the intermediate material conforms to the shape of the object.
- the intermediate material may be foam.
- the shape of the magnetic material 1524 may be any other shape (e.g., a square, a rectangle, etc.).
- the elastic material that partially covers and/or surrounds the magnetic material may have a corresponding shape or may be any shape.
- the elastic material 1524 has a disc shape
- the elastic material may be a disc shape or may be a square shape (or any other shape).
- the magnetic strap 1501 is attached to the object 1530 (e.g., see FIG. 15H ).
- the object 1530 may be a portable electronic device (e.g., a mobile phone, a music player, etc.) or any other object (e.g., a hand).
- the magnetic material 1524 is attached to the object 1530 and the magnet 1502 of the magnetic strap 1501 is magnetically attached to the magnetic material 1501 so that the magnetic strap 1501 is attached to the object 1530 .
- the connector 1516 is connected to a port on the object 1520 .
- the magnetic strap 1501 lays flat on the surface of the object 1530 . Note that the magnetic strap 1501 may also be incorporated into a case or into the object 1530 , as described herein.
- the magnetic strap 1501 does not have a predefined “top” side and a predefined “bottom” side. In other words, either face of the magnetic strap 1501 may be used as the top (or “face up”) side on the object 1530 . In some embodiments, the magnetic strap 1501 has a predefined “top” side and a predefined “bottom” side. In these embodiments, the magnetic strap 101 can only be used with the top side facing away from the object 1530 .
- FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a method 2200 for using a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- a strap of the cord management system may be used by itself or may be used in conjunction with magnetic beads and/or a magnetic material attached to the object.
- the magnetic strap 101 may be used with or without the electronic device 210 . In either case, steps 2202 - 2208 are performed.
- a cord is wrapped ( 2202 ) around the magnetic strap 101 substantially perpendicular to and/or otherwise across the magnetic strap 101 at any angle, wherein the strap includes a first set of magnets attached to a first location on the magnetic strap 101 and a second set of magnets attached to a second location on the magnetic strap 101 .
- the magnetic strap 101 is folded ( 2204 ) so that the magnetic strap 101 forms a loop around the cord.
- the loop is secured ( 2206 ) by coupling the first set of magnets and the second set of magnets.
- the cord when the user desires to use the cord, the cord is deployed ( 2208 ) from the magnetic strap 101 by pulling the cord away form the strap (e.g., substantially parallel to the length of the strap or in any other direction from the strap).
- the first set of magnets is decoupled from the second set of magnets so that the magnetic strap 101 no longer forms the loop around the cord.
- the cord may be deployed from the magnetic strap 101 by pulling the cord away from the magnetic strap 101 in a direction other than substantially parallel to the length of the magnetic strap 101 .
- FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a method 2300 for configuring a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- at least one magnetic material or magnet is attached ( 2302 ) to an object.
- the magnetic material 103 may be attached to the electronic device 210 .
- a plurality of magnetic beads and/or magnetic material is attached ( 2304 ) to a cord.
- at least one magnetic bead of the plurality of magnetic beads is attached to the cord so that when the cord is wrapped around the strap, the at least one magnetic bead is magnetically attached to one set of magnets and/or magnetic material of the magnetic strap.
- the cord is an audio cord of a headphone, which includes an audio connector and one or more speakers connected to the audio connector via the audio cord.
- a first magnetic bead of the plurality of magnetic beads is attached ( 2320 ) to the audio cord at a predetermined distance from the audio connector of the headphone.
- a second magnetic bead of the plurality of magnetic beads is attached ( 2322 ) to the audio cord at a predetermined distance from a first speaker in the one or more speakers of the headphone.
- a third magnetic bead of the plurality of magnetic beads is attached ( 2324 ) to the audio cord at a predetermined distance from a second speaker in the one or more speakers of the headphone.
- the cord (and/or a connector for the cord) is attached ( 2306 ) to a cord-attachment mechanism.
- the connector 204 of the cord 201 may be inserted into the cord-attachment mechanism of the magnetic strap 101 .
- a first set of magnets or magnetic material of the magnetic strap 101 is attached ( 2308 ) to the magnetic material or the magnet (e.g., the magnetic material 103 ) attached to the object.
- a material onto which the magnetic strap 101 can attach to the object is used (e.g., an adhesive disc, a suction cup, etc.).
- FIGS. 16-19 illustrate other embodiments of the cord management system.
- FIG. 16A illustrates a magnetic strap 1601 and a cord 1602 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic strap 1601 can be any of the magnetic straps discussed above (e.g., the magnetic straps 101 , 601 , 701 , 801 , or 901 ).
- the magnetic strap 1601 includes magnets 1605 and 1606 and the cord 1602 includes speakers 1603 and 1604 .
- the cord-attachment mechanism of the magnetic strap 1601 is not used to attach the magnetic strap 1601 to the cord 1602 .
- the magnetic strap 1601 is attached to the object.
- the magnetic strap 1601 is magnetically attached to the object.
- magnetic material e.g., the magnetic material 103
- the object e.g., using adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, etc., as described above
- the magnetic strap is coupled to the object.
- the magnetic strap 1601 is attached to the object using one selected from the group consisting of adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, and a van der Waals force attachment mechanism.
- the cord 1602 can be wrapped around the object and the magnetic strap 1601 and secured by folding the magnetic strap 1601 into the loop, as described above.
- FIG. 26A illustrates an object 2601 and the cord 201 secured by the magnetic strap 101 , according to some embodiments.
- the cord 201 and the magnetic strap 101 are detached from the object 2601 .
- a magnetic material 2602 is also attached to the object 2601 .
- the magnetic material 2602 may be located on the object 2601 so that when the magnetic strap 101 is attached to the object 2601 , one of the magnets 104 and 105 can be magnetically attached to the magnetic material 2602 .
- the end user may reattach the magnetic strap 101 and/or the cord 201 to the object 2601 without deploying the cord 201 from the magnetic strap 101 , as illustrated in FIG. 26B .
- FIG. 26C illustrates the magnetic strap 101 attached to the object 2601 , according to some embodiments.
- the connector for the cord 201 is not attached to the cord-attachment mechanism of the magnetic strap 101 .
- the magnetic strap 101 may be attached to the surface of the object 2601 using any of the attachment mechanisms discussed herein (e.g., magnets, suction cups, adhesives, etc.).
- the magnetic material 103 may be attached to the object.
- the magnets 104 and/or 105 may then be magnetically attached to the magnetic material 103 so that the magnetic strap 101 is attached to the object 2601 , as illustrated in FIG. 26C .
- the connector for the cord 201 is illustrated as being attached to a corresponding connector of the object 2601 , the connector of the cord 201 may also be disconnected from the corresponding connector. In other words, the connector of the cord 201 may dangle freely from the magnetic strap 2602 .
- FIG. 27A illustrates a magnetic strap 2701 attached to an object 2700 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic strap 2701 can be any of the magnetic straps discussed above (e.g., the magnetic straps 101 , 601 , 701 , 801 , or 901 ).
- the magnetic strap 2701 includes magnets 2705 and 2706 and the cord 2702 includes speakers 2703 and 2704 .
- the cord-attachment mechanism of the magnetic strap 2701 is not used to attach the magnetic strap 2701 to the cord 2702 .
- the magnetic strap 2701 is attached to the object.
- the magnetic strap 2701 is magnetically attached to the object.
- magnetic material e.g., the magnetic material 103
- the object e.g., using adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, etc., as described above
- the magnetic strap 2701 is attached to the object using one selected from the group consisting of adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, and a van der Waals force attachment mechanism.
- the cord 2702 can be wrapped around the object 2700 and the magnetic strap 2701 and secured by folding the magnetic strap 2701 into the loop, as described above. Note that since the object 2700 is larger than the object illustrated in FIG. 16A , the number of loops of the cord 2702 around the object 2700 is less than the number of loops of the cord 1602 around the object illustrated in FIG. 16A .
- FIGS. 27C and 27D are analogous to FIGS. 27A and 27B except that the magnetic strap 2701 in FIGS. 27C and 27D is rotated 90 degrees on the object 2700 and the cord 2702 is wrapped vertically around the object 2700 .
- FIGS. 27E and 27F are analogous to FIGS. 27A and 27B except that the magnetic strap 2701 in FIGS. 27E and 27F is attached to the top surface of the object 2700 and the cord 2702 is wrapped vertically around the object 2700 . As illustrated in FIGS. 27E and 27F , the connector for the cord 2702 is attached through the cord-attachment mechanism of the magnetic strap 2701 to the corresponding connector on the object 2700 .
- FIG. 27G is analogous to FIG. 26C and illustrates the magnetic strap 2701 securing the cord 2702 and attached to the object 2700 , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 17A illustrates a magnetic strap 1701 attached to an object, according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic strap 1701 can be any of the magnetic straps discussed above (e.g., the magnetic straps 101 , 601 , 701 , 801 , or 901 ).
- the magnetic strap 1701 includes magnets 1705 and 1706 and the cord 1702 includes speakers 1703 and 1704 .
- the cord-attachment mechanism of the magnetic strap 1701 is not present.
- the magnetic strap 1701 is attached to the object.
- the magnetic strap 1701 is magnetically attached to the object.
- magnetic material e.g., the magnetic material 103
- the object e.g., using adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, etc., as described above
- the magnetic strap is coupled to the object.
- the magnetic strap 1701 is attached to the object using one selected from the group consisting of adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, and a van der Waals force attachment mechanism.
- At least one surface of the magnetic strap 1701 is a high-friction surface.
- the high-friction surface faces the object and helps keep the magnetic strap 1701 from moving on the object.
- the cord 1702 can be wrapped around the object and the magnetic strap 1701 and secured by folding the magnetic strap 1701 into the loop, as described above.
- FIG. 28A illustrates a magnetic strap attached to an object, according to some embodiments.
- the magnetic strap 2801 can be any of the magnetic straps discussed above (e.g., the magnetic straps 101 , 601 , 701 , 801 , or 901 ).
- the magnetic strap 2801 includes magnets 2805 and 2806 and the cord 2802 includes speakers 2803 and 2804 .
- the cord-attachment mechanism of the magnetic strap 2801 is not present. In order to use the magnetic strap 2801 with the object, the magnetic strap 2801 is attached to the object.
- the magnetic strap 2801 is magnetically attached to the object.
- magnetic material e.g., the magnetic material 103
- the object e.g., using adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, etc., as described above
- the magnetic strap 2801 is attached to the object using one selected from the group consisting of adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, and a van der Waals force attachment mechanism.
- the cord 2802 can be wrapped around the object 2800 and the magnetic strap 2801 and secured by folding the magnetic strap 2801 into the loop, as described above. Note that since the object 2800 is larger than the object illustrated in FIG. 17A , the number of loops of the cord 2802 around the object 2800 is less than the number of loops of the cord 1702 around the object illustrated in FIG. 17A .
- FIGS. 28C and 28D are analogous to FIGS. 28A and 28B except that the magnetic strap 2801 in FIGS. 28C and 28D is rotated 90 degrees on the object 2800 and the cord 2802 is wrapped vertically around the object 2800 .
- FIGS. 28E and 28F are analogous to FIGS. 28A and 28B except that the magnetic strap 2801 in FIGS. 28E and 28F is attached to the top surface of the object 2800 and the cord 2802 is wrapped vertically around the object 2800 . As illustrated in FIGS. 28E and 28F , the connector for the cord 2802 is attached through the cord-attachment mechanism of the magnetic strap 2801 to the corresponding connector on the object 2800 .
- FIG. 28G is analogous to FIG. 26C and illustrates the magnetic strap 2801 securing the cord 2802 and attached to the object 2800 , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 18A illustrates a magnetic strap 1801 integrated into a case 1812 for an object, according to some embodiments.
- the term “case” refers to any type of material that covers or partially covers the object.
- the case may include, but is not limited to flip case, a zipper case, a skin, an open-faced case, and the like.
- the magnetic strap 1801 includes magnets 1802 and 1803 .
- the magnetic strap 1801 illustrated in FIG. 18A cannot be detached from the case 1812 .
- the operation of the magnetic strap 1801 is similar to the operation of the magnetic straps described above.
- the magnetic strap 1801 may be folded to form a loop, as illustrated in FIG. 18B . Note that the magnetic strap 1801 lies in a cavity of the case 1812 .
- FIG. 18B illustrates that the cavity is revealed when the magnetic strap 1801 is folded over to form the loop.
- one of the magnets 1802 and 1803 is a magnet and the other is a magnetic material.
- the magnetic strap 1801 is integrated into the object (e.g., the back of the object).
- FIG. 19A illustrates a case 1922 for an object, according to some embodiments.
- the case 1922 includes a cavity 1911 .
- Magnets 1912 and 1913 are embedded into cavity 1911 of the case 1922 .
- a magnetic strap 1911 including magnets 1902 and 1903 may be magnetically attached to the case 1922 , according to some embodiments.
- the magnets 1902 and 1903 may be magnetically attached to the magnets 1912 and 1913 , respectively.
- magnetic materials e.g., as described above
- only one of the pair of magnets 1902 and 1912 may be substituted for the magnetic material.
- the magnetic strap 1901 is similar to the operation of the magnetic straps described above.
- the magnetic strap 1901 may be folded to form a loop, as illustrated in FIG. 19C .
- the magnetic strap 1901 may be removed from the case 1922 (e.g., see FIG. 19A ).
- the magnetic strap 1901 is integrated into the object (e.g., the back of the object).
- FIGS. 19D-19F illustrate how the magnetic strap 1901 is used to secure a cord.
- FIG. 19D illustrates a cord wrapped around the magnetic strap 1901 and the case 1922
- FIG. 19E illustrates the magnetic strap 1901 folded over to form a loop around the cord
- FIG. 19F illustrates the magnetic strap 1901 securing the cord and detached from the case 1922 , according to some embodiments.
- FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating a computer system 2400 for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- the computer system 2400 typically includes one or more processing units (CPU's) 2402 , one or more network or other communications interfaces 2404 , memory 2410 , and one or more communication buses 2409 for interconnecting these components.
- the communication buses 2409 may include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components.
- the computer system 2400 optionally may include a user interface 2405 comprising a display device 2406 and input devices 2408 (e.g., keyboard, mouse, touch screen, keypads, etc.).
- Memory 2410 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM or other random access solid state memory devices; and may include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 2410 may optionally include one or more storage devices remotely located from the CPU(s) 2402 . Memory 2410 , or alternately the non-volatile memory device(s) within memory 2410 , comprises a computer readable storage medium. In some embodiments, memory 2410 stores the following programs, modules and data structures, or a subset thereof:
- Each of the above identified elements may be stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices, and corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above.
- the set of instructions can be executed by one or more processors (e.g., the CPUs 2402 ).
- the above identified modules or programs i.e., sets of instructions
- memory 2410 may store a subset of the modules and data structures identified above.
- memory 2410 may store additional modules and data structures not described above.
- Figure 2400 shows a “computer system,” Figure 2400 is intended more as functional description of the various features which may be present in a set of computer systems than as a structural schematic of the embodiments described herein. In practice, and as recognized by those of ordinary skill in the art, items shown separately could be combined and some items could be separated.
- FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a method 2500 for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- the method of manufacturing the cord management system may be performed by the computer system 2400 .
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 2502 ) a strap.
- the computer system 2400 then attaches ( 2504 ) a first set of magnets to a first location on the strap and attaches ( 2506 ) a second set of magnets to a second location on the strap.
- the strap includes at least two modes of operation.
- the first set of magnets is magnetically attached to the second set of magnets so that a first segment of the strap located between the first set of magnets and the second set of magnets forms a loop configured to secure a cord that is wrapped around the strap.
- the first set of magnets is magnetically detached from the second set of magnets so that the first segment no longer forms the loop.
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 2506 ) magnetic beads.
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 2508 ) magnetic material.
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 2510 ) a cord-attachment mechanism in the strap.
- the method 2500 may be governed by instructions that are stored in a computer readable storage medium and that are executed by one or more processors of one or more computer systems. Each of the operations shown in FIG. 25 may correspond to instructions stored in a computer memory or computer readable storage medium.
- the computer readable storage medium may include a magnetic or optical disk storage device, solid state storage devices such as Flash memory, or other non-volatile memory device or devices.
- the computer readable instructions stored on the computer readable storage medium are in source code, assembly language code, object code, or other instruction format that is interpreted and/or executable by one or more processors.
- FIGS. 29-34 illustrate various embodiments of a cord management system that include a case for an object.
- cases including, but not limited to, flip cases, zipper cases, skins, open-faced cases, bumpers, and the like.
- the embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 29-34 provide additional detail to what was described above with relation to the cases of FIGS. 18A-19F .
- FIGS. 18A-18B illustrate a magnetic strap 1801 integrated into a case 1802 .
- FIGS. 29A-29I and 30 A- 30 I provide more detail regarding integrated strap and case designs.
- FIGS. 19A-19F illustrate a magnetic strap 1901 removably attached to a case 1922 .
- FIGS. 31A-31J and 32 A- 32 J provide more detail regarding case designs with removable magnetic straps.
- FIGS. 33A-33L and 34 A- 34 L illustrate another embodiment for a case design which can be used with a removable magnetic strap.
- FIGS. 29A-29I illustrate another embodiment of an integrated case similar to that of FIGS. 18A-18B .
- FIG. 29A illustrates a strap 2904 integrated into a case 2902 for an object, according to some embodiments.
- the strap 2904 includes magnets (or other magnetic materials) 2908 and 2906 (shown in FIG. 29B ) at attachment points 2912 and 2910 (shown in FIG. 29B ).
- magnets or other magnetic materials
- 2906 and 2906 shown in FIG. 29B
- attachment points 2912 and 2910 shown in FIG. 29B
- the operation of the strap 2904 is similar to the operation of the magnetic straps described above.
- the strap 2904 may be folded to form a loop, wherein magnets located at attachment points 2910 and 2912 keep the strap 2904 in the looped position, as illustrated in FIG. 29A .
- the case 2902 at least partially covers the back side of an object when the object is located within the case.
- the strap 2904 is permanently attached to the case 2902 .
- the strap 2904 is formed as an integral part of the case 2902 .
- both the case and the strap are formed together by a molding process.
- the strap 2904 is permanently attached to the case after being manufactured separately. Permanent attachment mechanisms include sewing, joining, fastening, binding, welding, fusing, and similar permanent attachment techniques.
- the case includes a cavity 2914 .
- the cavity 2914 is sized to fit the strap 2904 .
- the case 2902 is a first color, such as black, while the strap 2904 is another color, such as pink, blue, orange, green, etc.
- the strap 2904 when in an unfolded flat position, lies flush with the exterior surface of the case 2902 .
- the strap 2904 partially protrudes from the cavity 2914 , such that a portion of the depth of the strap 2904 protrudes from the exterior surface of the case 2902 .
- the case 2902 does not include a cavity, so the strap 2904 sits on top of the exterior surface of the case 2902 when in a flat unfolded position.
- At least one case magnet (or other magnetic material) 2916 is included in the case 2902 .
- strap magnet/magnetic material 2908 When the strap is in an unfolded flat position, strap magnet/magnetic material 2908 will be magnetically attached to the case magnet/magnetic material 2916 .
- the strap 2904 can be kept in an unfolded position despite gravity and/or movement (as discussed above with respect to FIGS. 15G-H .)
- the case magnet/magnetic material 2916 may be especially useful in the embodiment shown in FIG. 29E , where no cavity exists in the case because the case magnet/magnetic material 2916 holds the strap 2904 in its unfolded position.
- FIGS. 29A-29B illustrate embodiments that do not include case magnet/magnetic material 2916 .
- alternatives to these figures that include one or more magnets (or other magnetic materials) embedded into the cavity are also envisioned.
- FIG. 29E illustrates only case magnet/magnetic material 2916 , which can be magnetically coupled to strap magnet/magnetic material 2908
- an additional case magnet/magnetic material can also be embedded in the case 2902 and can be magnetically coupled to strap magnet/magnetic material 2906 for any of the embodiments discussed above.
- at least one of the coupled pair of a case magnet/magnetic material and a strap magnet/magnetic material should be a magnet, while the other may be substituted with magnetic material.
- the case 2902 can be made of any suitable material such as leather, plastic, rubber, fabric, polymer, metal, etc.
- the polymer is selected from the group consisting of silicone and an elastomer (e.g., thermoplastic elastomer).
- the polymer is resistant to dust.
- These polymers may be used in manufacturing processes such as injection molding, casting, compression molding, and die cutting (as discussed above with respect to FIGS. 6A-6C ).
- the fabric may be a Neoprene fabric, leather, silk, cotton, denim, foil, Mylar, and the like.
- the fabric case will likewise be manufactured by any suitable sewing or joining technique, depending on the fabric chosen.
- the case will be a combination of plastic, metal, rubber and/or silicone.
- at least a portion of the case 2902 includes a non-skid material in order to facilitate easy gripping by the user.
- at least a portion of the case 2902 is made of a slippery material having a lower coefficient of friction than another portion of the case 2902 , in order to allow the case to slide easily into and out of a pocket.
- at least the portion of the case covering the object's antenna (if any), will not be made of metal.
- the case will also include a separate finish, such as a painted finish, a scratch resistant finish, a mirrored finish, etc.
- a separate finish such as a painted finish, a scratch resistant finish, a mirrored finish, etc.
- the term “case” refers to any type of material that covers or partially covers the object.
- the case may include, but is not limited to flip case, a zipper case, a skin, a bumper, an open-faced case illustrated in these figures, and the like.
- the strap 2904 will likewise be made of any suitable material, including any of the materials described above for the case. In some embodiments, the strap 2904 will be made of the same material(s) as the case, while in other embodiments the strap will be made of distinct material(s). In some embodiments, the strap is composed of a material that is substantially memoryless. (A material that is memoryless is a material that does not exhibit elastic hysteresis, as discussed above with respect to FIGS. 6A-6C .) In some embodiments, the memoryless material is an elastic polymer.
- the elastic polymers embodiments of the case and strap may be manufactured by processes such as injection molding, casting, compression molding, and die cutting (as discussed above with respect to FIGS. 6A-6C ).
- the type of manufacturing process selected may depend on factors such as a desired manufacturing volume, manufacturing time, and manufacturing costs of the strap 2904 and the case 2902 . Additionally, the type of manufacturing process selected may depend on a desired aesthetic design of the strap 2904 and case 2902 . For example, if the design of the strap requires that the strap magnets/magnetic materials 2906 and 2908 are to be encapsulated in the material of the strap, an injection molding process may be used. For example, in some embodiments, a two-shot injection molding process is used.
- the strap will have dimensions of 3.09 inches in length, by 0.51 inches in width, and a depth sufficiently thick to hold a magnet/magnetic material embedded therein. In other embodiments, the strap will have dimensions of 2.94 inches in length, by 0.51 inches in width, and a depth sufficiently thick to hold a magnet/magnetic material embedded therein. In still other embodiments, the strap will have dimensions of 3.02 inches in length, by 0.51 inches in width, and a depth sufficiently thick to hold a magnet/magnetic material embedded therein. Thus, in many embodiments, the strap will not have a length of greater than 4 inches or a width of greater than 1 inch. Note that the dimensions of the strap 2904 may be selected to accommodate cords of varying lengths and thicknesses.
- the dimensions of the strap 2904 are also selected to accommodate objects (e.g., portable electronic devices, etc.) of varying sizes.
- the strap 2904 includes a handle at one end, which is a raised portion or high friction of material of the strap 2904 that allows a user to grab onto the end of the strap (as discussed with respect to FIGS. 6A-6C ).
- the strap includes a notch (e.g., for a fingernail), cut-out, or other surface feature that allows a user to more easily grasp the strap 2904 .
- the straps need not have uniform thicknesses as shown in these figures, but may also include variable cross-sections, like the embodiments shown in FIGS. 6A-9C .
- the magnets of the strap or the case may include any element or composition that is capable of producing a magnetic field.
- the magnets may include one or more of magnetic metallic elements (e.g., iron, cobalt, nickel, etc.), composite magnets (e.g., ceramic or ferrite magnets, alnico magnets, ticonal magnets, injection molded magnets, flexible magnets), rare earth magnets (e.g., samarium-cobalt magnets, neodymium-iron-boron magnets, etc.), electromagnets, sets of any of these magnets, or any material or composition that produces a magnetic field.
- magnetic metallic elements e.g., iron, cobalt, nickel, etc.
- composite magnets e.g., ceramic or ferrite magnets, alnico magnets, ticonal magnets, injection molded magnets, flexible magnets
- rare earth magnets e.g., samarium-cobalt magnets, neodymium-iron-boro
- metals that are (or are capable of being) magnetic include, but are not limited to: ferritic stainless steels; martensitic stainless steels; SAE 400 series stainless steels (e.g., SAE Type 416 stainless steel); SAE 1000-9000 series steels (e.g., SAE 1008 steel); alloys of nickel, iron, and/or cobalt; and/or iron.
- the magnets are Neodymium magnets. In some embodiments, the Neodymium magnets are a grade N42. In some embodiments, the magnets are solid magnets. In some embodiments, the magnets are selected from the group consisting of donut (ring) magnets, horseshoe-shaped (U-shaped) magnets, cylindrical magnets, disc-shaped magnets, rectangular magnets, and the like. In some embodiments, the magnets are sets of magnets. The selection of the size, shape, and number of the magnets may depend on factors including, but not limited to, a desired magnetic strength, a desired form factor, a desired aesthetic, and the manufacturing process used to produce the strap.
- one or more of the case and strap “magnets” can be made of a magnetic material rather than a magnet.
- the magnetic material can be made of any material that produces a magnetic field in response to an applied magnetic field.
- the magnetic material is selected from the group consisting of a ferromagnetic material and a paramagnetic material.
- the magnetic material is low-carbon steel.
- the magnetic material is Vanadium carbonyl.
- the magnetic material may be any shape, including, but not limited to, a disc, a square, a rectangle, a decorative shape, and the like.
- the size and shape of the magnetic material may be selected based on factors including, but not limited to, an aesthetic design of the case and strap. Furthermore, as described in more detail, with respect to FIGS. 33A-33L , the entire case back, or a portion thereof, can be made of a magnetic material.
- the case 2902 will include a cord-attachment mechanism 2918 to secure a cord (and/or a connector for a cord) to the case 2902 .
- the cord-attachment mechanism 2918 also secures a cord (and/or a connector for a cord) to the object within the case 2902 in addition to any securing mechanisms the object itself may include to secure a cord (and/or a connector for a cord) to the object.
- the cord-attachment mechanism 2918 will have slits such as one slit, two slits configured as an “X” or a “+,” slits in the shape of a star etc.
- a simple hole 2918 in the case is provided. In some embodiments, this hole 2918 is larger than the cord or connector for the cord, and does not substantially contribute to securing the cord to the object or the case.
- the hole 2918 is dimensioned smaller than the cord or the connector for the cord and is made of an elastic material such that the hole 2918 expands as the cord (or the connector for the cord) is inserted into the hole 2918 thus securing the cord to the case.
- the diameter of the hole 2918 may be determined based on factors including the range of diameters for cords and/or connectors for the cords to be used with the case.
- the cord-attachment mechanism 2918 is formed from an elastic polymer (e.g., by injecting an elastic polymer into a mold for the case.)
- the elastic polymer may be the elastic polymers described above.
- the cord-attachment mechanism 2918 is composed of the same polymer as the case or strap.
- the cord-attachment mechanism is composed of different, but compatible, polymers.
- the case includes holes for object elements such as speakers, a dock/charger connector, a camera/lens, an LED/flash, a ringer mode switch, an on/off switch, etc.
- one hole will accommodate more than one element.
- a large bottom hole 2920 is configured to expose the dock/charger connector and the speakers.
- a single back hole 2922 is configured to expose the LED/flash and the camera/lens.
- FIG. 29G also illustrates a side hole 2924 which is configured to expose the ringer mode switch.
- Alternative embodiments will provide differently shaped holes such as a larger and/or differently shaped hole for the LED/flash and camera/lens and a larger and/or differently shaped hole for the dock/charger connector and the speakers. Similarly, in other embodiments, separate holes are provided for each of the LED/flash and the camera/lens. Likewise, in some embodiments, separate holes are provided for each of the speakers and the dock charger. In some embodiments holes will also be provided for access to volume buttons. The exact dimensions and placement of the holes is determined based on the specific requirements of the object inserted into the case 2902 .
- a track wheel hole is also included in the case.
- a track wheel hole is also included in the case.
- a large hole is provided in the front of the case for viewing the screen (whether touch sensitive or otherwise).
- the front of the case may include a transparent screen cover.
- the camera hole may include a small built in lens to improve the quality of pictures taken with the object's built-in camera lens.
- the edges of the holes are beveled, re-enforced with a stronger material, or covered with a protective coating. These additions allow the holes to withstand greater wear and tear during use than the case could otherwise withstand.
- the case may include a hole to allow a support stand element to pass through the case.
- FIGS. 29F and 29G in some embodiments certain elements, such as buttons, rather than just being available through a hole as described above, are instead covered.
- FIG. 29F illustrates a cover 2926 over a button on the top edge of an object
- FIG. 29G illustrates covers 2928 and 2930 over buttons on a side edge of the object.
- the button covers e.g., 2926 , 2928 , and 2930
- the button covers are made of a pliable material such as rubber or silicone.
- the button covers are made of a rigid material such as plastic or metal. Any of the above mentioned materials discussed with respect to the case 2906 may be used for the button covers.
- the button covers keep the object within the cover more protected from dirt, debris, and moisture which could otherwise accumulate. Furthermore, the button covers protect the buttons from scratches. Similarly, in some embodiments, the holes for the camera, LED/flash, and screen are covered with a transparent material such as glass or transparent plastic to similarly protect the device. In some embodiments, the button covers are recessed with respect to the exterior surface of the case as shown in FIG. 29H , such that the button covers 2928 and 2930 do not stick out past the profile of the case 2902 , and are thus less likely to be inadvertently pressed. In other embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 29F and 29G , the button covers are not recessed with respect to the exterior surface of the case. It should be noted that in some embodiments, the button covers are colored differently from the case in order to make them easier for a user to locate, and to add to the aesthetic appeal of the case.
- the operation of the strap 2904 is similar to the operation of the straps described above with respect to almost all of the figures in this application.
- the strap 2904 may be folded to form a loop, securing a cord wrapped around the case 2902 as illustrated in FIG. 29I .
- magnetic attachment mechanisms are described as existing at the attachment points 2910 and 2912 (shown in FIG. 29B ), other attachment mechanisms are also envisioned.
- snaps hook and loop mechanisms, Velcro, adhesives, magnetic beads, suction devices, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms, buttons, buckles, springs, bistable springs (e.g., a slap bracelet), sleeves that insert into slots, pegs that are inserted into holes, hinges, and snaps may be used.
- a hook portion of a Velcro attachment is provided at attachment point 2910 while a loop portion of a Velcro attachment point is provided at 2912 (or vice versa). When the two attachment points are brought into contact with one another, they will keep the strap 2904 in a looped position as shown in FIG. 29A .
- a stud portion of a snap attachment is provided at attachment point 2910 while a socket portion of a snap attachment point is provided at 2912 (or vice versa).
- a socket portion of a snap attachment point is provided at 2912 (or vice versa).
- a button is provided at attachment point 2910 while a button hole is provided at 2912 (or vice versa). When these two attachment points are brought into contact with one another, they will keep the strap 2904 in a looped position as shown in FIG. 29A .
- FIGS. 30A-30I illustrate embodiments of a case similar to FIGS. 29A-29I , with the exception that the object for which the case is made has different dimensions than the object shown in FIGS. 29A-29I .
- FIGS. 31A-31J illustrate an embodiment of a case similar to FIGS. 29A-29I above except that in these embodiments the strap is semi-permanently, rather than permanently attached to the case.
- the semi-permanent attachment is done by means of a case magnet 3106 having a strength greater than the case magnets discussed above, or by using larger or multiple magnets.
- the stronger case magnet 3106 is three to ten times stronger than the case and strap magnets discussed with respect to FIGS. 29A-I (e.g. 2906 , 2908 , and 2916 ). Note that the combination of the grade (i.e., the composition of materials, wherein a higher number for the grade indicates a higher magnetic strength per unit volume), the diameters, the shape, and the thickness of a magnet determines the magnetic strength of the magnet.
- case magnet 3106 can comprise high grade magnets (e.g., higher “N” number), or magnets with larger surface area, diameter, or thickness.
- case magnet 3106 can comprise multiple magnets or any other configuration, material, or combination of materials that provides a greater magnetic force between case magnet 3106 and strap magnet/magnetic material 3110 .
- the stronger case magnet 3106 is embedded within cavity 3114 .
- the case 3102 also includes another magnet or magnetic material 3108 embedded in the cavity 3114 , and being similar to the magnets and magnetic materials discussed above.
- the magnet/magnetic material 3108 is weak enough that magnet/magnetic material 3112 of the strap 3104 can be easily detached therefrom in order to form a loop for holding a cord (similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 29I ).
- the stronger case magnet 3106 is strong enough that a much greater force must be exerted to detach strap magnet/magnetic material 3110 from stronger case magnet 3106 , thus making the strap 3104 unlikely to become detached from the case 3102 unless the user specifically detaches it.
- the strap magnet/magnetic material 3110 is also stronger than the magnets discussed with respect to FIGS. 29A-I , thus making the connection between strap magnet/magnetic material 3110 and case magnet 3106 even harder to detach.
- FIG. 31B shows a strap, held in a case 3102 having a cavity 3114 , which is the depth of the strap 3104 (such that the strap 3104 in an unfolded flat position lies flush with the exterior surface of the case 3102 ).
- FIG. 31C shows an embodiment in which the cavity 3114 has a smaller depth than the strap, such that a portion of the depth of the strap 3104 protrudes from the exterior surface of the case 3102 .
- the case 3102 does not include a cavity, so the strap 3104 sits on the surface of the exterior surface of the case 3102 when in a flat unfolded position, as shown.
- the second magnet/magnetic material, case magnet/magnetic material 3108 is optional.
- the semi-permanent attachment(s) are non-magnetic attachment area(s) 3116 and 3118 on the strap 3104 with a corresponding attachment area(s) 3120 and 3122 on the case 3102 .
- the non-magnetic attachment mechanisms include snaps (as shown here). In other embodiments, they include hook and loop mechanisms, Velcro, adhesives, magnetic beads, suction devices, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms, buttons, buckles, springs, bistable springs (e.g., a slap bracelet), sleeves that insert into slots, plastic interlocking strip fasteners (e.g., Ziploc® brand closure mechanisms), pegs that are inserted into holes, or hinges.
- FIG. 31E an embodiment of the case is illustrated in which two non-magnetic attachment areas 3120 and 3122 are included within cavity 3114 . In other embodiments, only one non-magnetic attachment area 3120 may be used. Furthermore, in some embodiments, a non-magnetic attachment area 3120 is also included in embodiments that do not have a cavity. In some embodiments, when the case 3102 does not have a cavity, the non-magnetic attachment area 3120 can be a separate attachment device (similar to the magnetic material 1524 of FIGS. 15 and 16 ). The user can then attach this non-magnetic attachment area 3120 on any portion of the device desired.
- FIG. 31F illustrates a non-magnetic attachment area 3120 located in the center of the back of the case 3102 .
- the semi-permanent attachment is a non-magnetic mechanism on one edge 3124 of strap 3104 and cavity 3114 as shown in FIG. 31G .
- the edge attachment mechanism 3124 is a zipper, plastic interlocking strip fastener (e.g., Ziploc® brand closure mechanism), hook and loop mechanism, adhesive, magnetic strip, suction device, buckle, sleeve that inserts into a slot, hinges, etc.
- FIG. 31H shows an embodiment where the case includes a cavity 3114 that also exposes a headphone jack or similar cord-attachment area 3126 of the object.
- any of the straps discussed with respect to FIGS. 6-9 can be used in conjunction with the case.
- the embodiments of FIGS. 6-9 include a cord-attachment mechanism (e.g. 609 ) located at one end of the strap, where the cord-attachment mechanism is configured to removably attach the strap to the cord and sometimes also to the object.
- a cord-attachment mechanism e.g. 609
- one mechanism for semi-permanent attachment of the strap 3104 to the case 3102 is the cord-attachment mechanism ( 609 , 709 , 810 , 909 respectively) of the strap 3104 used in conjunction with a cord (or the connector for the cord) that is inserted therein, as shown in FIG. 31I .
- the cord-attachment mechanism 3128 is used in conjunction with the magnetic or non-magnetic semi-permanent attachments discussed above. For example, FIG.
- 31J shows an embodiment of the case 3102 without a cavity 3114 in which the strap 3104 is semi-permanently attached to the case 3102 by means of the cord (or the connector for the cord), cord-attachment mechanism 3128 and at least one magnet/magnetic material of the strap 3112 .
- FIGS. 32A-32J illustrate embodiments of a case similar to FIGS. 31A-31J , with the exception that the object for which the case is made has different dimensions than the object shown in FIGS. 31A-31J .
- FIGS. 33A-33L illustrate other embodiments of a case 3302 that can be paired with a removable, detachable, or semi-permanent strap 3304 .
- FIG. 33A illustrates the case with a back 3306 made of a magnet or of a magnetic material, referred to herein as a magnetic material back 3306 .
- the magnetic material back 3306 can be made of any ferromagnetic material and/or paramagnetic material.
- the magnetic material is low-carbon steel.
- the magnetic material is Vanadium carbonyl.
- the magnetic material back 3306 is made of a pliable material such as rubber, silicone, an elastomer (e.g., thermoplastic elastomer), or other pliable materials discussed above, wherein the pliable material encapsulates small magnets or magnetic material elements within it.
- the back is made of an elastomer or paint with iron flecks in it.
- the back is discussed in detail herein, other portions of the case may also be made of a magnet or magnetic material.
- substantially all of the case, including the sides and front is made of a metal magnetic material (with the exception of portions near or over a device's antenna).
- all of the case is made of a magnetic material, such as a magnetic metal.
- only a portion of the back of the case includes the magnetic material back 3306 .
- the magnetic material back 3306 covers only three-quarters, half, one quarter, or less of the back of the object.
- the case includes a bumper to at least partially prevent a surface of the object (contained within the case) from contacting the magnetic material of the case.
- a bumper can reduce the likelihood that the metal case will scratch, scrape, and/or score the surface of an object within the case.
- the bumper can act as an impact buffer, reducing the likelihood of damage to an object should the case be dropped when it is holding the object.
- the bumper is a piece of foam, rubber, plastic, fabric, and/or leather on a surface of the case, and configured to be disposed between the case and the object when the object is in the case.
- a case 3302 with a magnetic material back 3306 allows a user to position a strap 3304 on any desired portion of the magnetic material back that the user desires, like magnets on a refrigerator door.
- the strap 3304 can be placed in any position on the magnetic material back 3306 .
- FIG. 33B illustrates the strap 3304 in a similar position to the straps shown in FIGS. 29A-32J (to facilitate retaining a cord wrapped horizontally around the case).
- the strap 3304 can be placed horizontally on the magnetic material back 3306 as shown in FIG. 33C , which would facilitate retaining a cord wrapped vertically around the case.
- the strap 3304 can also be positioned in the middle of the magnetic material back 3306 . A variety of other positions of the strap should be apparent to one of skill in the art.
- FIG. 33E shows a strap 3304 including a cord-attachment mechanism 3312 , like those straps shown in FIGS. 6-9 (e.g. cord-attachment mechanism 609 ), used in conjunction with the magnetic material back 3306 .
- FIG. 33B shows a strap 3304 that does not include a cord-attachment mechanism, similar those straps shown in FIGS. 17-19 , also used in conjunction with the magnetic material back 3306 .
- the strap 3304 be positioned by a user such that it neatly holds a wrapped cord when the cord is attached to an object as shown in FIG. 33F , but this design also allows a user to position the strap 3304 in optimal positions for holding the cord when it is not attached to the object. For example, the user may place the strap 3304 in the middle of the magnetic material back 3306 for holding an unplugged looped cord, as shown in FIG. 33G .
- the magnetic material back 3306 is exposed as shown in FIG. 33A , while in other embodiments the magnetic material back 3306 is encapsulated in an encapsulating material 3314 as shown in FIG. 33H .
- the encapsulating material 3314 is pliable material such as rubber, leather, plastic, polymer, fabric (silk, cotton, denim, foil, Mylar, Neoprene fabric), etc.
- the encapsulating material 3314 is a rigid material such as glass, plastic, metal, mirrored material, etc.
- the encapsulating material is waterproof and/or scratch resistant. The encapsulating material 3314 may also protect the metal back while also holding it in place.
- the encapsulating material is made of a non-skid type surface (i.e. the material has a high coefficient of friction) such as rubber or silicone to assist the user in holding the object.
- the encapsulating material has a relatively low coefficient of friction such as leather or plastic in order to allow the case to slide easily into and out of a pocket.
- Some embodiments include a combination of the above mentioned encapsulating materials on different portions of the case 3302 (as discussed in more detail with respect to FIGS. 30K and 30L ).
- the materials are made of different colors. The different colored portions of the case may add aesthetic appeal to the case, and may serve to distinguish the various portions of the case from one another.
- the magnetic material back 3306 is held in place by a rim of encapsulating material stretched around the edge of the magnetic material back 3306 .
- the encapsulating material does not cover the back, but instead frames it.
- the magnetic material back 3306 is covered with a coating material such as an opaque or translucent paint, polyurethane, scratch resistant gloss, etc.
- the coating is applied directly to the surface of the back prior to the back being joined to the case 3302 .
- the coating may protect the back, it does not necessarily hold it in place in the same manner as the encapsulating material.
- a portion of the case 3302 is molded over the magnetic material back 3306 such that the magnetic material back 3306 is held in place.
- the case 3302 can be made of any of the materials discussed with respect to FIGS. 29A-29I .
- the rim of case 3302 that contacts the magnetic material back 3306 is made of an elastomer material such as rubber or silicone that is molded over the edges of the magnetic material back 3306 .
- the back is slidably connected to the case 3302 .
- the magnetic material back 3306 fits into a pocket 3316 or tracks in the case 3302 as shown in FIG. 33I .
- This figure illustrates the magnetic material back 3306 in a position to be inserted into the pocket 3316 to clearly illustrate the pocket element of this embodiment, although when in use the magnetic material back 3306 would be slid entirely or substantially entirely into the pocket 3316 .
- the back might also slide into place from a side opening pocket rather than the top opening pocket shown in FIG. 33I .
- the pocket 3316 itself has one or more holes exposing the back.
- the pocket 3316 includes a large hole making the pocket more like a picture frame encapsulating the magnetic material back 3306 , wherein the magnetic material back 3306 is slid into tracks in the pocket or frame.
- the pocket 3316 will include one or two large sides to keep the magnetic material back 3306 more firmly in place, as shown in FIG. 33I .
- the pocket may include an external transparent plastic side, which can be seen through, and which does not significantly diminish the magnetic properties of the magnetic material back 3306 , but which holds the magnetic material back 3306 of the case firmly against the object's back. This transparent plastic side also protects the back from scratches and may also be waterproof.
- one portion 3318 of the magnetic material back 3306 is distinct from the rest of the back.
- the portion 3318 is covered in a heartier covering that is more resistant to scratches such as a polymer coating, a translucent paint, polyurethane, a scratch resistant gloss, etc.
- the portion 3318 is painted or dyed a different color from the rest of the magnetic material back 3306 to show the ideal spot for the strap 3304 to be attached or for decorative purposes.
- the portion 3318 includes a slight indentation (similar to the cavities described above) to indicate a suggested spot for the magnetic strap to attach.
- the portion 3318 includes a slight raised area to indicate a suggested spot for the magnetic strap to attach.
- the portion 3318 is made of one or more magnets, while the remainder of the magnetic material back 3306 is made of a magnetic material.
- the remainder of the case i.e., the portions of the case excluding the magnetic material back 3306
- portions of the case can include a pliable material, which will help facilitate the insertion of an object into the case, especially in embodiments where the magnetic material back 3306 of the case 3302 is rigid.
- the remainder of the case is made of a combination of pliable materials and rigid materials. For example, as shown in FIG. 33K , portions of the band surrounding the top, bottom, and side edges of the object are made of pliable or stretchable material such as a rubber material, while other portions are made of a rigid material such as a plastic material.
- FIG. 33K portions of the band surrounding the top, bottom, and side edges of the object are made of pliable or stretchable material such as a rubber material, while other portions are made of a rigid material such as a plastic material.
- 33L illustrates the different portions of this embodiment in an exploded view, which further illustrates which portions of the case 3302 are made of plastic (or similar non-magnetic rigid materials) and which are made of silicone/rubber (or similar non-magnetic pliable materials).
- FIGS. 34A-34L illustrate embodiments of a case similar to FIGS. 33A-33L with the exception that the object for which the case is made has different dimensions than the object shown in FIGS. 33A-33L .
- At least a portion of a cord management system includes a color-changing material that changes color when it is subjected to different environmental conditions.
- Color-changing materials can be employed in order to give an item, such as a case or strap for a cord management system, an attractive, decorative appearance.
- color-changing materials can be designed or selected in order to display dynamic color schemes on the case. For instance, when a user holds a mobile electronic device case that incorporates a thermochromic material, the heat from a user's hand may cause a handprint to appear on the case in a distinct color (or colors) from other portions of the case.
- the case is configured so that a user can use a finger, flashlight, laser, heat pen, heat brush, or other object to “draw” on the case.
- a case with a color-changing material can add an element of novelty and attractiveness to the cord management system, and can increase the appeal and entertainment value of such cases.
- thermochromic materials are used in some embodiments to provide information to a user of a device, for example by indicating a temperature of a device. Color-changing materials, including thermochromic materials, are disclosed in greater detail herein.
- a cord management system includes a case for a mobile electronic device.
- Mobile electronic devices include any of a class of electronic devices that are small and light enough to be easily transported with a person.
- a mobile electronic device is a self contained electronic device which usually has one or more of: a screen, buttons, a touch screen, a keyboard, a speaker, a lens, and a microphone. They are often battery powered, and often include electronic components (e.g., batteries, processors, memory, circuit boards, and the like) surrounded by a cover or housing.
- a mobile electronic device is an audio player, a portable video player, a handheld gaming system, a navigation device, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, an e-book reader, a personal digital assistant, a camera, a camcorder, and/or a handheld video projector.
- Mobile electronic device cases are often used to protect, cover, and/or accessorize mobile electronic devices.
- FIG. 38 illustrates a case 3802 that includes a color-changing material on a portion 3804 of the case, according to some embodiments.
- the color-changing material is indicated by wavy lines.
- the color changing portion 3804 is the back of the case 3802 .
- other portions of the case 3802 may include color-changing material.
- the entire case 3802 includes color-changing material.
- one or more edges of the case 3802 include color-changing material.
- one or more buttons or button covers on the case 3802 include color-changing material.
- the color-changing material is a thermochromic material.
- Thermochromic materials are materials that change color due to changes in the temperature of the material and/or the environment surrounding the material.
- the color-changing material is a photochromic material. Photochromic materials change color due to a change in the wavelength and/or intensity of light incident on the material. Photochromic materials are discussed in greater detail herein.
- a change in color corresponds to any change in hue, brightness, shade, tint, and/or saturation that is detectable by the human eye.
- a change in color of a material corresponds to a change from one Pantone color standard to another Pantone color standard.
- a color changing material will change to (or will transition between) a first color (e.g., black) and a second color (e.g., green). In some embodiments, a color changing material will transition between additional colors, for example, changing between black and green and purple and blue.
- materials that provide interesting or decorative visual characteristics are used.
- materials that exhibit geometric metameric failure are used. Such materials appear to a viewer to be different colors depending on the viewing angle, the viewing distance, and/or the lighting angle.
- materials exhibiting geometric metameric failure including paints, coatings, dyes, etc. are referred to as metameric materials.
- FIG. 39 illustrates a case 3902 that includes a thermochromic material according to some embodiments.
- the case 3902 shows the case 3902 in a state when more than one color is visible.
- the case 3902 shows a first portion 3904 of the case that is a first color, a second portion 3906 of the case that is a second color, and a third portion 3908 of the case that is an intermediate color (or a plurality of intermediate colors).
- the first, second, and third portions of the case correspond to different temperatures.
- the first portion 3904 of the case corresponds to a first temperature, such as a temperature around 70 degrees Fahrenheit
- the second portion 3906 of the case corresponds to a second temperature which is higher than the first temperature, such as a temperature around 95 degrees Fahrenheit
- the third portion 3908 of the case, corresponding to the intermediate (or plurality of intermediate colors) corresponds to temperatures between 70 and 95 degrees Fahrenheit.
- the lines between the first and second portions of the case shown in FIG. 39 are intended merely as a functional illustration the color-changing properties of a case in accordance with some embodiments, and are not intended to show exact color boundaries or temperature gradients.
- a color-changing material is incorporated in a case in such a way that a design becomes visible or not visible (or less visible) only when certain environmental conditions exist.
- FIG. 40 illustrates a case 4002 where a design 4004 is incorporated in a thermochromic material on the case 4002 , according to some embodiments.
- the design 4004 is set against a background 4005 .
- the background 4005 refers to an area of the case that is near or adjacent to the design.
- at least part of the design 4004 is thermochromic material.
- at least part of the background 4005 is thermochromic material.
- both the design 4004 and the background 4005 include some portions that are thermochromic material.
- FIG. 40 shows how the design 4004 may be visible on a portion of the case having a first temperature, and not visible (or less visible) on a portion of the case having a second temperature.
- FIG. 40 shows a first portion 4006 of the case and a second portion 4008 of the case.
- the first portion 4006 corresponds to the case 4002 having a first temperature, where the design 4004 is visible as indicated by the solid lines of the design 4004 .
- the second portion 4008 corresponds to the case having a second temperature, where the design 4004 is not visible (or less visible) as indicated by the dashed lines of the design 4004 .
- a user could cause the design 4004 to appear or disappear, for example, by using his or her hand to heat up such a case.
- the design 4004 is made of (or includes) a color-changing material that is the same color as the background 4005 when the color-changing material is subject to a first environmental condition, and is a different color from the rest of the case when the background 4005 is subject to another environmental condition.
- the design 4004 will appear to be the same color as the background 4005 (i.e., not visible or less visible) or appear to be a different color than the background 4005 (i.e., visible) based on the specific environmental condition of the color-changing material.
- the background 4005 is made of (or includes) a color-changing material that is the same color as the design 4004 when the color-changing material is subject to a first environmental condition, and is a different color from the design 4004 when the case is subject to another environmental condition.
- both the design 4004 and the background 4005 are made of (or include) a color-changing material.
- the color changing materials each display different colors at different environmental conditions, and/or different colors at the same environmental conditions.
- the flower design is merely exemplary, and the design could be any design.
- the design is any of: representational designs (e.g., flowers, animals, faces), non-representational designs (e.g., dots, lines, patterns), and informational designs (e.g., words, logos, trademarks).
- FIG. 41 illustrates an embodiment where different portions of the case 4102 include different color-changing materials.
- the first portion 4104 includes a first color-changing material
- the second portion 4106 includes a second color-changing material
- the third portion 4108 includes a third color-changing material.
- the three portions each display a different color from one another when the case 4102 is at a first environmental condition.
- the three portions each display a different color from one another when the case 4102 is at a second environmental condition.
- each portion of case 4102 displays one color at the first environmental condition, and another color at the second environmental condition.
- thermochromic material is used so that the portions of the case change color in response to different temperatures.
- the first portion 4104 is red, the second portion 4106 is green, and the third portion 4108 is blue.
- the first portion 4104 is orange, the second portion 4106 is yellow, and the third portion 4108 is black.
- only two portions of the case 4102 include color-changing materials, while in other embodiments, three or more portions of the case include color-changing material.
- the color-changing material is a thermochromic material that is configured to change color in response to a temperature change caused by the device within the case.
- a thermochromic material that is configured to change color in response to a temperature change caused by the device within the case.
- mobile electronic devices often heat up when they are in use, such as when a user is making a telephone call on a mobile telephone.
- the increased temperature of the device (and the case holding the device) is caused by the heating up of a battery during use.
- a case can be designed for a mobile electronic device where the thermochromic material is designed to change color in accordance with the increased battery temperature typical for that device.
- a case includes a design that displays certain colors, symbols, and/or designs to indicate the temperature of the device.
- a design may provide a user with other information about the device as well. For example, since the temperature of a battery powered electronic device may increase over a period of time, the temperature of the device (and accordingly of a case holding the device) may be used as a proxy for the duration that a device has been in use. Thus, a thermochromic material is sometimes used to indicate how long a user has been using an electronic device.
- FIG. 42 illustrates a case 4202 including a design 4204 , according to some embodiments.
- the design 4204 is a temperature indicating design that illustrates the temperature of the device, and therefore, in some embodiments, the duration that a device has been in use.
- the design 4204 in FIG. 42 uses shapes of increasing size to indicate increased device temperature, although any suitable differentiation could be used.
- the design 4204 is shown when the case 4202 is in an intermediate temperature state. At this state, the first three bars are visible as indicated by the solid lines, and the two largest bars (indicating a higher temperature) are not visible, as indicated by the dashed lines. Thus, the design 4204 may indicate a certain temperature of the device, and thus indicate to a user how long the device has been in use.
- a design may be visible at a higher temperature and not visible (or less visible) at a lower temperature.
- a design may be visible at a lower temperature and not visible (or less visible) at a higher temperature.
- a case can be configured to display multiple different designs based on different temperatures of combinations of temperatures.
- the heat produced by the electronic device does not cause a thermochromic material to change color.
- the heat of a user's hand is the main cause of a color change on a case.
- a case may incorporate a temperature indicating design for indicating the temperature of the air surrounding the case. Accordingly, it may be beneficial for the portion of the case comprising thermochromic material to be least partially thermally insulated from the electronic device within the case in order to limit the effect of a battery's heat on the thermochromic material. Insulating materials are discussed in greater detail herein with reference to FIG. 43 .
- FIG. 43 illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of portion of some embodiments of a case.
- the case includes a protective coating 4302 , an ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating 4304 , a color-changing material 4306 , a magnetic material portion 4308 , a polymer portion 4310 , and an insulating element 4312 .
- the protective coating 4302 is an at least semi-transparent coating, painting, covering, sealer, film, sheet, and/or finish.
- the protective coating 4302 is sometimes designed to help prevent scratches, dents, or other damage to an underlying layer (e.g., the color changing material 4306 , an alternative paint layer, and/or a magnetic material portion 4308 ).
- the protective coating 4302 helps prevent underlying layers from peeling and/or flaking.
- the protective coating 4302 includes the ultra-violet inhibiting coating 4304 , or otherwise includes an ultra-violet radiation inhibiting material. In these embodiments, the two coatings may only be a single layer of material.
- the protective coating 4302 is urethane, polyester, lacquer, epoxy, resin, plastic, and/or glass.
- the color-changing material 4306 is a material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions, as described in more detail below.
- the color-changing material 4306 is, in some embodiments, a thermochromic material, a photochromic material, or a metameric material.
- the color-changing material 4306 is a paint, coating, and/or film layer component of a case. Also, the color-changing material 4306 is substituted with a standard, non-color-changing material in some embodiments.
- the ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating 4304 prevents or limits the transmission of ultra-violet radiation to subsequent layers or coatings of the case.
- the color-changing material 4306 degrades when exposed to ultra-violet radiation, resulting in diminished color changing properties.
- other colors, paints, and/or designs fade when exposed to ultra-violet radiation.
- ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating 4304 helps limit the damaging effects of ultra-violet radiation.
- a case includes a magnetic material portion 4308 and a polymer portion 4310 .
- the specific materials for a case in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are discussed in greater detail elsewhere in this application, and will not be discussed in detail here.
- the insulating element 4312 is an insulator such as glass, fiberglass, plastic, elastomer, and/or rubber.
- a case is configured such that an air gap exists between the thermochromic material and a device within the case. The air gap insulates the device from the thermochromic material, and can be used in addition to or instead of the insulating element 4312 .
- the case does not include an insulating element 44312 .
- the insulating element 4312 is a portion of a case that has a color-changing material.
- a plastic or polymer case may have a color-changing paint on an outer surface, and the plastic or polymer that makes up the case may act as an insulating element.
- a color-changing material is incorporated in a skin that is applied to a portion of the case.
- FIG. 44A illustrates a case 4402 with a decorative skin 4404 , where the skin 4404 is partially attached to the case 4402 .
- the skin 4404 is applied to a portion of the case using magnets, adhesives, or other embedding or coating methods.
- the skin 4404 includes a magnet or magnetic material 4406 that can removably attach the skin 4404 to a case for a mobile electronic device that has a magnetic material back.
- the skin 4404 is incorporated into the case such that it is not easily or conveniently removed.
- the decorative skin 4404 can be permanently or semi-permanently applied to a case for a mobile electronic device.
- the skin 4404 is sometimes glued or adhered to the case with adhesives, adhered to the case using a static force, or applied to the case and then securely covered by a coating.
- the decorative skin 4404 further comprises one or more edges defining through-holes 4405 between the first and second sides, wherein the one or more through-holes 4405 are configured to allow optical access through the skin 4404 by a component of the mobile electronic device.
- the through-holes are sometimes positioned so that a lens and/or a flash component of a mobile electronic device are not covered by the skin.
- thermochromic material in some embodiments, at least a portion of the non-contacting side of the skin includes a thermochromic material.
- the skin does not include a thermochromic material, but has another design and/or decoration instead.
- Designs may include, but are not limited to, representational designs, non-representational designs, and informational designs. Such designs may include a color, word, picture, photograph, outline, shape, image, and/or logo.
- decorative skins include a magnet or magnetic material 4406 as an attachment mechanism allowing them to attach to and decorate and/or personalize a case for an object.
- the case has a magnetic material surface such as a magnetic material back, and skins are magnetically attached to the case via the magnetic material surface.
- the attachment mechanism is selected from any of: adhesive, Velcro, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms (e.g., Gecko tape), and suction devices (e.g., suction cups).
- the skins are permanently attached to the case (e.g., with an adhesive).
- a color-changing material is incorporated into a decorative sheeting material.
- the decorative sheeting material is permanently or semi-permanently incorporated into a case for a mobile electronic device.
- FIG. 44B illustrates a partial cross sectional view of a portion of some embodiments of a decorative sheeting 4409 .
- the decorative sheeting 4409 includes a first layer comprising a first substrate 4410 .
- the first substrate 4410 is made of any suitable substrate material, including but not limited to plastic and/or polymer films, such as polyester films (e.g., Mylar).
- the decorative sheeting 4409 includes a second layer comprising a second substrate sub-layer 4416 and a color-changing material sub-layer 4412 that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions.
- the color changing material sub-layer 4412 includes thermochromic liquid crystals.
- the first layer and the second layer are layered with respect to one another such that the color-changing material sub-layer 4412 is between the first substrate 4410 and the second substrate 4416 .
- the second layer includes an ultra-violet radiation inhibiting material sub-layer 4414 .
- the ultra-violet radiation inhibiting material sub-layer 4414 is oriented between the second substrate sub-layer 4416 and the color-changing material sub-layer 4414 .
- the first layer, or the first substrate 4410 of the first layer has an opaque coloring or is coated with an opaque material.
- the opaque coloring is any dark color, while in some embodiments, the opaque coloring is substantially black.
- the second substrate sub-layer 4416 and the ultra-violet radiation inhibiting sub-layer 4414 are transparent or semi-transparent, allowing the color changing-material sub-layer 4412 to be visible to a viewer of the case.
- the decorative sheeting 4409 (or the substrates 4410 , 4416 of the decorative sheeting 4409 ) are so dimensioned so as to cover substantially all of a surface of a case for a mobile electronic device, such as a mobile phone, music/audio player, laptop computer, tablet computer, and the like. In some embodiments, the dimensions correspond to a back surface of a case for a mobile electronic device.
- the decorative sheeting 4409 further comprises one or more edges defining through-holes between the first and second sides, wherein the one or more through-holes are configured to allow optical access through the sheet by a component of the mobile electronic device.
- the through-holes are sometimes positioned so that a lens and/or a flash component of a mobile electronic device are not covered by the sheet.
- the decorative sheeting 4409 is combined with a magnetic material 4406 to form a decorative skin for a mobile electronic device case, as described above.
- the range of temperatures between which the thermochromic material changes colors is 32-95 degrees Fahrenheit. In some embodiments, the temperature range is 50-95 degrees Fahrenheit. In some embodiments, the temperature range is 70-140 degrees Fahrenheit.
- the thermochromic material can be designed to display various colors, ranges of colors, or combinations of colors, in response to different material temperatures. In some embodiments, the material displays only two colors. In some embodiments, the material displays three or more colors. In some embodiments, the material may simultaneously display a first portion having a first color and a second portion having a second color. For example the material may display a blue portion and a green portion. In some embodiments, the material displays multiple portions and multiple colors (e.g., portions displaying blue, green, purple, red, orange, etc.).
- thermochromic materials may exhibit a particular color throughout a range of temperatures.
- a thermochromic material has a first color (e.g., black) when the material is between a first and a second temperature (e.g., between 60-70 degrees Fahrenheit), and a second color (e.g., blue) when the material is between a third and a fourth temperature (e.g., 120-140 degrees Fahrenheit).
- thermochromic material changes fluidly between the first and second color as the temperature rises from the second to the third temperature.
- a material (or combination of materials) may also exhibit more than one color in response to a single temperature or temperature range.
- a thermochromic material may exhibit the same or a similar color at two non-contiguous temperature ranges.
- a thermochromic material may be black when the material is between 60 and 70 degrees Fahrenheit, and black when the material is above 95 degrees Fahrenheit, while displaying various other colors in the intermediate temperature region.
- thermochromic materials include thermochromic liquid crystals, and/or Leuco dyes.
- thermochromic liquid crystals include thermochromic liquid crystals, and/or Leuco dyes.
- a thermochromic material can be incorporated into paint, dye, epoxy, ink, wax, film, and/or any other type of coating or covering that will allow the thermochromic material to be seen by a user of the case.
- the thermochromic material is embedded in paint or other coating that is applied to a portion of or all of the case.
- multiple thermochromic materials are combined in a single paint or coating.
- thermochromic material exhibiting a color change over a first temperature range and a second thermochromic material exhibiting a color change over a second temperature range may be combined to produce a paint or coating exhibiting interesting or desirable color-changing results.
- more than two thermochromic materials are used in a single paint or coating.
- the paint or coating is applied substantially only to outer portions of the case, such as those portions of the case that are visible when a mobile electronic device is in the case.
- the thermochromic material is embedded in a polymer, plastic, elastomer, or other material that makes up a portion of or all of the case.
- a surface of a case is sometimes made out of a plastic that has been treated with (or otherwise includes) a thermochromic material.
- the entire case is molded from a plastic that has been treated with (or otherwise includes) a thermochromic material.
- the color-changing material used in a case for a mobile electronic device is a photochromic material.
- Photochromic materials are materials that change color due to a change in the incident light.
- a photochromic material may change color when it is exposed to a change in intensity and/or wavelength of light.
- light can include electromagnetic radiation of many wavelengths, even those that are outside of the visible spectrum.
- photochromic materials include photochromic substances or molecules such as spiropyrans and spirooxazines, diarylethenes, azobenzenes, and/or photochromic quinones. Photochromic materials can be used instead of, or in addition to, the thermochromic materials described above.
- thermochromic materials are understood to apply by analogy to photochromic materials as well.
- the temperature of the thermochromic material is described as the cause of a color change
- the wavelength or intensity of incident light on a photochromic material is understood to be the cause of a color change.
- thermochromic and photochromic materials both the color-changing substances (e.g., the liquid crystals, Leuco dyes, and/or other color-changing molecules) and the materials that use such substances to display color-changing effects (e.g., film embedded with thermochromic dye, paint with thermochromic liquid crystals, etc) may be referred to as “photochromic materials” and/or “thermochromic materials.”
- photochromic materials film embedded with thermochromic dye, paint with thermochromic liquid crystals, etc
- thermochromic materials any discussion relating to one type of color-changing material (e.g., thermochromic materials) is understood to apply to similar embodiments using other color-changing materials as well (e.g., photochromic materials).
- any of the above described methods are understood to equally apply to methods of manufacturing cases with metameric materials.
- some embodiments provide methods according to the above descriptions where metameric materials are substituted for color-changing materials and/or thermochromic materials.
- FIG. 35 is a flowchart of a method 3500 for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- the method of manufacturing the cord management system may be performed by the computer system 2400 .
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 3502 ) a case for an object.
- the computer system 2400 then forms ( 3504 ) a strap that is permanently attached to the case.
- the strap includes a first attachment point at a first location on the strap and a second attachment point at a second location on the strap.
- the strap includes at least two modes of operation. In a first mode of operation, the first attachment point is attached to the second attachment point. In a second mode of operation, the first attachment point is detached from the second attachment point.
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 3506 ) a cord-attachment mechanism located at a third location on the case.
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 3508 ) one or more button covers configured to protect one or more buttons of the object, while allowing the one or more buttons to be operable.
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 3510 ) one or more holes configured to expose one or more elements of the object.
- FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a method 3600 for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- the method of manufacturing the cord management system may be performed by the computer system 2400 .
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 3602 ) a case for an object, comprising a semi-permanent case attachment mechanism at a first location.
- the computer system 2400 then forms ( 3604 ) a strap for semi-permanently attaching to the case, comprising at least one semi-permanent strap attachment element at a first location on the strap, the semi-permanent strap attachment element configured to semi-permanently attach to the semi-permanent case attachment element; at least one first attachment point at a second location on the strap; and at least one second attachment point at a third location on the strap.
- the strap includes at least two modes of operation. In a first mode of operation, the first attachment point is attached to the second attachment point. In a second mode of operation, the first attachment point is detached from the second attachment point.
- FIG. 37 is a flowchart of a method 3700 for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments.
- the method of manufacturing the cord management system may be performed by the computer system 2400 .
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 3702 ) a case for an object, the case having a front, a back, a bottom, a top, a first side, and a second side; wherein at least a portion of the back is made of a magnetic material; and wherein at least a portion of at least one of the front, bottom, top, first side, and second side is made of one or more non-magnetic materials.
- the computer system 2400 forms ( 3704 ) a cord-attachment mechanism; one or more button covers; and one or more holes.
- FIG. 45 is a flow chart illustrating a method ( 4500 ) of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device with a color-changing material, according to some embodiments.
- a case for a mobile electronic device is provided ( 4502 ).
- the case has a front, a back, a bottom, a top, a first side, and a second side ( 4504 ).
- at least a portion of the back is made of a magnetic material ( 4506 ).
- at least a portion of at least one of the front, bottom, top, first side, and second side is made of one or more non-magnetic materials ( 4508 ).
- a color-changing material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions is applied to at least a portion of the case ( 4510 ).
- the color-changing material is painted on the case.
- the color-changing material is sometimes sprayed or brushed on the case.
- the color-changing material is printed on the case, for example, with an ink jet printing system.
- the color-changing material is screen-pressed on the case.
- the color changing material is incorporated in a covering that is removably attached to the case ( 4512 ), for example, a film and/or a sheet (e.g., the decorative skin 4404 , described above).
- the covering is removably attached to the case ( 4514 ).
- the covering is a magnetic sheet that is configured to be removably attached to a case that incorporates magnetic material. Sheets (or skins) are described in greater detail above with reference to FIG. 44A-B .
- the covering is permanently or semi-permanently attached to the case.
- the color-changing material used in the above case is thermochromic ( 4516 ), while in other embodiments, the color-changing material is photochromic ( 4518 ). In some embodiments, the color-changing material uses both thermochromic and photochromic materials.
- FIG. 46 is a flow chart illustrating a method ( 4600 ) of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device, according to some embodiments.
- One or more color-changing materials that change color when subjected to different environmental conditions are provided ( 4602 ).
- One or more non color-changing materials are provided ( 4604 ).
- the color-changing material is thermochromic ( 4606 ).
- the color-changing material is photochromic ( 4608 ).
- the case is manufactured according to an assembly process ( 4610 ).
- One or more color-changing portions for a case are formed using the one or more color-changing materials ( 4612 ).
- One or more non color-changing portions for a case are formed using the one or more color-changing materials ( 4614 ).
- a case for a mobile electronic device is created, where the case incorporates the one or more color-changing and the one or more non color-changing portions ( 4616 ). In some embodiments, the case is created by assembling the color-changing and non color-changing portions.
- the case is manufactured according to a molding process ( 4618 ).
- a case for a mobile electronic device is formed including the color-changing and non color-changing materials ( 4620 ).
- the case is formed by injection molding.
- the color-changing material is a thermochromic material (such as thermochromic liquid crystals) that is incorporated into a non color-changing polymer that is then injection molded or thermoformed to form a case for a mobile electronic device.
- FIG. 47 is a flow chart illustrating a method of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device, according to some embodiments ( 4700 ).
- a case for a mobile electronic device is provided ( 4702 ).
- Some thermochromic coatings exhibit improved visual results (i.e., more vivid colors and/or more colors) when they cover or are on top of a dark and/or black surface.
- at least a portion of the case is black ( 4704 ).
- the black portion of the case comprises a dark and/or black coating, such as a paint and/or a powder coating ( 4706 ).
- thermochromic coating is applied to at least a portion of the case ( 4708 ).
- the thermochromic coating is any of: paint, ink, dye, film, and powder coatings.
- the thermochromic coating is sprayed on the portion of the case.
- the thermochromic coating is printed on the portion of the case.
- the thermochromic coating is a decorative sheeting, e.g., the decorative sheeting 4409 .
- an ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating is applied over at least a portion of the thermochromic coating ( 4710 ). This layer helps protect the thermochromic material from degradation due to ultra-violet radiation.
- a substantially clear coating is applied over at least a portion of the ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating ( 4712 ). The substantially clear coating is sometimes a hard, protective coating to help prevent the thermochromic and/or the ultra-violet inhibiting coatings from being chipped, peeled, scratched, or otherwise damaged.
- an ultra-violet inhibiting material is incorporated into a substantially clear coating, in order to reduce the number of steps in the method ( 4700 ).
- the ultra-violet inhibiting material is sprayed, printed, screen-pressed, and/or painted on the case.
- FIG. 48 illustrates a method of manufacturing a decorative sheeting, according to some embodiments ( 4800 ).
- a first layer is provided, where the first layer comprises a first substrate ( 4802 ).
- a substantially black coating is applied to the first substrate ( 4803 ).
- a second substrate is provided ( 4804 ).
- an ultra-violet inhibiting material is applied to the second substrate ( 4805 ).
- the ultra-violet inhibiting material is a coating that is sprayed or painted on.
- the ultra-violet inhibiting material is a film.
- a color-changing material is applied to the second substrate (or to the ultra-violet inhibiting material) to form a second layer ( 4806 ).
- the color-changing material is a material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions, such as a thermochromic or photochromic material.
- the first layer and the second layer are layered to form a decorative sheeting ( 4808 ).
- the two layers are oriented with respect to one another such that the color-changing material is between the first substrate and the second substrate.
- the ultra-violet inhibiting material applied in step ( 4805 ) helps protect the color-changing material from degradation due to ultra-violet radiation. As such, in some embodiments, it is applied to the substrates such that, when the decorative sheeting is applied to an object, the color-changing material is between the object and the ultra-violet inhibiting material.
- FIG. 49 illustrates a method of using a case for a mobile electronic device, where the case comprises a color-changing material ( 4900 ).
- a case is provided, where a portion of the case comprises a color-changing material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions ( 4902 ). At least a portion of the color-changing material is changed from a first environmental condition to a second environmental condition ( 4904 ).
- a user causes the color-changing material to be changed from a first temperature to a second temperature.
- the user uses a finger, flashlight, laser, heat pen, and/or heat brush, or other object to cause the temperature change.
- the color-changing material changes from a first color to a second color ( 4906 ).
- the methods 3500 - 3700 and 4500 - 4800 may be governed by instructions that are stored in one or more computer readable storage mediums and that are executed by one or more processors of one or more computer systems. Each of the operations shown in FIGS. 35-37 and 45 - 48 may correspond to instructions stored in a computer memory or computer readable storage medium.
- the computer readable storage medium may include a magnetic or optical disk storage device, solid state storage devices such as Flash memory, or other non-volatile memory device or devices.
- the computer readable instructions stored on the computer readable storage medium are in source code, assembly language code, object code, or other instruction format that is interpreted and/or executable by one or more processors.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Purses, Travelling Bags, Baskets, Or Suitcases (AREA)
- Telephone Set Structure (AREA)
Abstract
A case for a mobile electronic device is provided. The case includes a removable magnetic material back that covers substantially all of a back side of the mobile electronic device when the device is housed within the case. The removable magnetic material back includes magnetic material and a substantially planar exterior surface facing away from the mobile electronic device when the mobile electronic device is housed within the case. The case also includes a skin including magnetic material. The skin is configured to be removably coupled with the substantially planar exterior surface of the removable magnetic material back via magnetic attraction between the removable magnetic material back of the case and the magnetic material of the skin. In some embodiments, the case further includes a pocket and the removable magnetic material back is configured to be slidably removed from a side portion and/or a top portion of the pocket.
Description
- This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/093,748, filed Apr. 25, 2011, which is a continuation-in-part of PCT Patent Application No. PCT/US2010/053244, filed on Oct. 19, 2010, which is a continuation-in-part of PCT Patent Application No. PCT/US2010/031087, filed on Apr. 14, 2010, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- This application is related to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/761,333, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,261,416, filed Apr. 15, 2010, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/607,285, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,590,823, filed Sep. 7, 2012, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/908,256, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,615,849, filed Oct. 20, 2010, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/140,389, filed Dec. 24, 2013, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- This application is also related to the following U.S. Design patent application Ser. No. 29/368,746 (filed Aug. 27, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D636,649), Ser. No. 29/368,755 (filed Aug. 27, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D667,291), Ser. No. 29/388,372 (filed Mar. 28, 2011) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D645,333), Ser. No. 29/401,643 (filed Sep. 13, 2011) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D675,505), Ser. No. 29/401,359 (filed Sep. 11, 2011) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D682,070), Ser. No. 29/401,930 (filed Sep. 16, 2011) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D675,904), Ser. No. 29/401,360 (filed Sep. 11, 2011) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D675,903), Ser. No. 29/428,997 (filed Aug. 6, 2012) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D685,254), Ser. No. 29/458,903 (filed Jun. 24, 2013) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D708,505), Ser. No. 29/491,146 (filed May 16, 2014)(now U.S. Design Pat. No. D729,616), Ser. No. 29/375,648 (filed Sep. 24, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D647,519), Ser. No. 29/375,649 (filed Sep. 24, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D669,062), Ser. No. 29/375,651 (filed Sep. 24, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D669,063), Ser. No. 29/376,041 (filed Sep. 30, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D676,033), Ser. No. 29/376,257 (filed Oct. 4, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D671,101), Ser. No. 29/376,428 (filed Oct. 6, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D671,102), Ser. No. 29/376,430 (filed Oct. 6, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D671,103), Ser. No. 29/382,637 (filed Jan. 5, 2011) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D671,109), Ser. No. 29/377,918 (filed Oct. 27, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D671,104), Ser. No. 29/377,919 (filed Oct. 27, 2010 (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D671,105), Ser. No. 29/377,921 (filed Oct. 27, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D671,106), Ser. No. 29/378,110 (filed Oct. 29, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D676,837), Ser. No. 29/378,118 (filed Oct. 29, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D671,107), Ser. No. 29/378,119 (filed Oct. 29, 2010) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D671,108), Ser. No. 29/443,386 (filed Jan. 16, 2013) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D708,930), Ser. No. 29/443,387 (filed Jan. 16, 2013) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D691,462), Ser. No. 29/443,389 (filed Jan. 16, 2013) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D702,535), Ser. No. 29/444,911 (filed Feb. 5, 2013) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D706,118), Ser. No. 29/465,282 (filed Aug. 26, 2013) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D718,118), Ser. No. 29/488,367 (filed Apr. 17, 2014) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D729,615), Ser. No. 29/492,497 (filed May 30, 2014) (now U.S. Design Pat. No. D729,617), Ser. No. 29/485,515 (filed Mar. 19, 2014), Ser. No. 29/506,796 (filed Oct. 20, 2014), Ser. No. 29/519,750 (filed Mar. 6, 2015), Ser. No. 29/519,753 (filed Mar. 6, 2015), and Ser. No. 29/519,754 (filed Mar. 6, 2015). Each of the aforementioned related design applications is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- The disclosed embodiments relate generally to a case with a removable magnetic material back for a mobile electronic device.
- Many portable electronic devices (e.g., as mobile phones, audio players, video players, etc.) generate audio output. To maintain privacy (e.g., for phone calls, etc.) and/or to improve user experience (e.g., for music and/or video playback, for noisy environments, etc.), a user may choose to use headphones. Although some portable electronic devices support wireless headphones that receive audio signals wirelessly (e.g., Bluetooth, etc.), many users of electronic devices still use wired headphones that receive audio signals through an audio cord connected to an audio port of the portable electronic device. Unfortunately, wired headphones can become easily tangled when the portable electronic device is not being used. For example, the cord of the wired headphone may become tangled when the portable electronic device is stored in a bag or a purse. Similarly, other electronic devices may use video cables, audio cables, and/or power cords that present similar cord management issues to the user.
- One solution to this problem is to detach the cord of the wired headphone from the portable electronic device and to store the wired headphones separately. For example, the wired headphones may be stored in a special pouch or container. Similarly, the cord of the wired headphones may be wrapped around itself so that the cord does not become tangled. However, detaching the cord from the portable electronic device is cumbersome because the cord must be reattached (and possibly removed from a container or unwound) prior to being able to use the wired headphones with the portable electronic device. Furthermore, the headphones may become lost or may be forgotten if the headphones are detached from the portable electronic device.
- Another solution to this problem is to wrap the cord of the wired headphones around the portable electronic device without detaching the cord from the portable electronic device. However, the cord of the wired headphone may become unwrapped and tangled. Furthermore, although the cord may be organized when it is wrapped around the portable electronic device, once the cord is detached from the portable electronic device, the cord may become unwrapped.
- Thus, a cord management system that solves the aforementioned problems is desirable.
- Some embodiments provide a case for an object. The case has a front, a back, a bottom, a top, a first side, and a second side. In some embodiments, substantially all of the case is made of magnetic material.
- In some embodiments, the magnetic material is magnetic metal, such as SAE 1008 steel; an alloy of iron, cobalt, and/or nickel; and/or SAE Type 416 stainless steel.
- In some embodiments, the case has a bumper to at least partially prevent a surface of the object from contacting the magnetic material of the case. In some embodiments, the bumper is disposed between the case and an object when the object is in the case. In some embodiments, the object is a mobile electronic device.
- Some embodiments provide a case for a mobile electronic device. The case has a front, a back, a bottom, a top, a first side, and a second side. At least a portion of the case comprises a color-changing material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions. In some embodiments, the majority of the back of the case comprises a color-changing material. In some embodiments, the case includes designs that incorporate color-changing materials.
- In some embodiments, the color-changing material is a thermochromic material that changes color due to a change in temperature of the thermochromic material. In some embodiments, the thermochromic material is a thermochromic coating, paint, and/or film. In some embodiments, the thermochromic material includes thermochromic liquid crystals and/or leuco dye.
- In some embodiments, the case includes an insulator between the thermochromic material and the object within the case.
- In some embodiments, the color-changing material is photochromic material, such as a photochromic coating, paint, and/or film.
- In some embodiments, at least a portion of the back of the case is made of a magnetic material, at least a portion of at least one of the front, bottom, top, first side, and second side is made of one or more non-magnetic materials.
- Some embodiments provide a decorative skin for a mobile electronic device case. The skin includes a sheet with a first side and a second side, where the first side has magnets and/or magnetic materials for removably attaching the sheet to a case for a mobile electronic device that has a magnetic material component. The skin also includes a second side with a decoration, such that when the sheet is removably attached to the case, the decorative treatment is presented to a user. In some embodiments, the sheet has one or more through-holes. In some embodiments, the decoration comprises a thermochromic material, a photochormic material, a metameric material, a color, and/or a design.
- Some embodiments provide a method of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device. The method includes providing one or more color-changing materials that change color when subjected to different environmental conditions, providing one or more non color-changing materials, forming one or more color-changing portions of a case, forming one or more non color-changing portions of a case, and creating a case for a mobile electronic device incorporating the one or more color-changing portions and the one or more non color-changing portions.
- Some embodiments provide a method of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device. The method includes providing one or more color-changing materials that change color when subjected to different environmental conditions, providing one or more non color-changing materials, and forming a case for a mobile electronic device including the color-changing and the non color-changing materials.
- Some embodiments provide a method of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device. The method includes providing a case for a mobile electronic device, and applying to at least a portion of the case a color-changing material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions.
- Some embodiments provide a method of manufacturing a case for an electronic device. The method includes providing a case for a mobile electronic device, applying a thermochromic coating to at least a portion of the case, and applying an ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating over at least a portion of the thermochromic coating. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the case is black, and the thermochromic coating is applied over at least a portion of the black portion of the case. In some embodiments, a clear coating is applied over at least a portion of the ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating.
- In some embodiments, the cases are manufactured with metameric materials.
-
FIG. 1 illustrates components of a cord management system, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 2A illustrates a cord wrapped around a magnetic strap and an electronic device, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 2B illustrates a cord wrapped around a magnetic strap and the electronic device, wherein the magnetic strap is folded over the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 2C illustrates a cord removed from the electronic device, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 2D illustrates a cord wrapped around a magnetic strap and a hand of an end user, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 2E illustrates a cord wrapped around a magnetic strap and the hand of the end user, wherein the magnetic strap is folded over the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 2F illustrates a cord removed from the hand of the end user, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 2G illustrates a cord that is partially wrapped around a magnetic strap and the electronic device, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 2H illustrates a process for deploying a cord wrapped around the electronic device, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 2J continues the process of deploying the cord illustrated inFIG. 2H , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 2K continues the process of deploying the cord illustrated inFIG. 2J , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 3A illustrates a process for managing a cord using a magnetic strap and magnetic beads, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 3B continues the process illustrated inFIG. 3A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 3C continues the process illustrated inFIG. 3B , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 3D continues the process illustrated inFIG. 3C , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 3E continues the process illustrated inFIG. 3D , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 3F illustrates a configuration to secure the free end of the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 3G illustrates an alternative configuration to secure the free end of the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 3H illustrates an alternative configuration to secure the free end of the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 3J illustrates an alternative configuration to secure the free end of the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 3K illustrates an alternative configuration to secure the free end of the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 4A illustrates a process for deploying a cord wrapped around the electronic device with the assistance of a magnetic material located on the electronic device, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 4B continues the process of deploying the cord illustrated inFIG. 4A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 4C continues the process of deploying the cord illustrated inFIG. 4B , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 4D illustrates the strap ofFIG. 4C folded over into the loop configuration, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 5A illustrates an end user using an electronic device and a cord with magnetic beads, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 5B illustrates using the magnetic beads to secure speaker cords of the cord ofFIG. 5A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 5C illustrates the end user using the electronic device and the cord with magnetic beads when the cord is fully-deployed, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 5D illustrates using the magnetic beads to secure speaker cords of the cord ofFIG. 5C , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 6A illustrates a top view of a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 6B illustrates a perspective view of the magnetic strap illustrated inFIG. 6A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 6C illustrates a side view of the magnetic strap illustrated inFIG. 6A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 7A illustrates a top view of a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 7B illustrates a perspective view of the magnetic strap illustrated inFIG. 7A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 7C illustrates a side view of the magnetic strap illustrated inFIG. 7A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 8A illustrates a top view of a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 8B illustrates a perspective view of the magnetic strap illustrated inFIG. 8A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 8C illustrates a side view of the magnetic strap illustrated inFIG. 8A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 8D illustrates a shape of the magnets of the magnetic strap illustrated inFIG. 8A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 8E illustrates another shape of the magnets of the magnetic strap illustrated inFIG. 8A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 9A illustrates a top view of a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 9B illustrates a perspective view of the magnetic strap illustrated inFIG. 9A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 9C illustrates a side view of the magnetic strap illustrated inFIG. 9A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 10A illustrates a cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 10B illustrates another cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 10C illustrates another cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 10D illustrates another cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 10E illustrates another cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 11A illustrates a side view of a grommet for a cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 11B illustrates a perspective view of a grommet for a cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 11C illustrates another grommet for a cord-attachment mechanism, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 12A illustrates a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 12B illustrates another magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 12C illustrates another magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 12D illustrates another magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 12E illustrates another magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 12F illustrates another magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 13A illustrates a top view of a magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 13B illustrates a side view of the magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 13C illustrates a cross-section view of the magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 13D illustrates another cross-section view of the magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 14A illustrates a magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 14B illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 14C illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 14D illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 14E illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 14F illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 14G illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 14H illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 14J illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 14K illustrates another magnetic bead, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 15A illustrates a process of attaching a magnetic bead to a cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 15B illustrates the magnetic bead ofFIG. 15A attached to the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 15C illustrates another magnetic bead that is attached to the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 15D illustrates several magnetic beads that are attached to the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 15E illustrates a process of attaching a connector for the cord to a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 15F illustrates the connector ofFIG. 15E attached to the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 15G illustrates a magnetic material attached to an object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 15H illustrates an assembled cord managements system, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 15J illustrates views of the magnetic material, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 16A illustrates a magnetic strap attached to an object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 16B illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 16A folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 17A illustrates a magnetic strap attached to an object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 17B illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 17A folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 18A illustrates a magnetic strap integrated into a case for an object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 18B illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 18A folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 19A illustrates a case for an object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 19B illustrates a magnetic strap attached to the case illustrated inFIG. 19A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 19C illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 19B folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 19D illustrates a cord wrapped around the magnetic strap and the object ofFIG. 19B , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 19E illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 19D folded over to form a loop around the cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 19F illustrates the strap securing the cord detached from the object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 20A illustrates a process for managing a cord, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 20B continues the process illustrated inFIG. 20A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 20C continues the process illustrated inFIG. 20B , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 20D continues the process illustrated inFIG. 20C , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 20E continues the process illustrated inFIG. 20D , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 21A illustrates a process for deploying a cord wrapped around a device, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 21B continues the process illustrated inFIG. 21A , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 21C continues the process illustrated inFIG. 21B , according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a method for using a cord management system, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a method for configuring a cord management system, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating a computer system for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 26A illustrates an object and a cord secured by a magnetic strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 26B illustrates the magnetic strap attached to the object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 26C illustrates the magnetic strap attached to the object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 27A illustrates a magnetic strap attached to an object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 27B illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 27A folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 27C illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 27A rotated 90 degrees, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 27D illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 27C folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 27E illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 27A attached to a top surface of the object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 27F illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 27E folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 27G illustrates the magnetic strap securing a cord and attached to the object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 28A illustrates a magnetic strap attached to an object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 28B illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 28A folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 28C illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 278 rotated 90 degrees, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 28D illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 28C folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 28E illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 28A attached to a top surface of the object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 28F illustrates the magnetic strap ofFIG. 28E folded to form a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 28G illustrates the magnetic strap securing a cord and attached to the object, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 29A illustrates a case with an integrated strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 29B illustrates another case with an integrated strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 29C illustrates another case with an integrated strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 29D illustrates a case with a strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 29E illustrates another case with a strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 29F illustrates a top view of a case, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 29G illustrates a back view of a case, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 29H illustrates a close up perspective view of a portion of a case, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 29I illustrates an integrated strap folded into a loop and securing a cord wrapped around a case, according to some embodiments. -
FIGS. 30A-30I illustrate embodiments of cases similar to those inFIGS. 29A-29I . -
FIG. 31A illustrates a case with a semi-permanently attached strap with the strap detached, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 31B illustrates a case with a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 31C illustrates another case with a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 31D illustrates another case with a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 31E illustrates another case with a semi-permanently attached strap with the strap detached, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 31F illustrates a case with a non-magnetic attachment area, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 31G illustrates another case with a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 31H illustrates a case with a cavity, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 31I illustrates a case with a cavity and a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 31J illustrates a case without a cavity, with a semi-permanently attached strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIGS. 32A-32J illustrate embodiments of cases similar to those inFIGS. 31A-31J . -
FIG. 33A illustrates a case with a magnetic material back, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33B illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and a strap attached to a location on the case, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33C illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and a strap attached to another location on the case, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33D illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and a strap attached to another location on the case, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33E illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and another strap, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33F illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and a strap folded into a loop and securing a cord wrapped around a case, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33G illustrates a case with a magnetic material back and a strap folded into a loop and securing a cord wrapped in a loop, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33H illustrates a case with an encapsulated magnetic material back, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33I illustrates a case with a magnetic material back to be inserted into a pocket in the case, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33J illustrates a case with a magnetic material back having distinct portions, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33K illustrates a case with a magnetic material back, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 33L illustrates an exploded perspective view of a case with a magnetic material back, according to some embodiments. -
FIGS. 34A-34L illustrate embodiments of cases similar to those inFIGS. 3A-33L . -
FIG. 35 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of method for manufacturing another cord management system, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing another cord management system, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 38 illustrates a case including color-changing material on a portion of the case, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 39 illustrates a case with a thermochromic material, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 40 illustrates a case with a design incorporating thermochromic materials, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 41 illustrates a case where portions of the case include thermochromic materials, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 42 illustrates a case with a design incorporating thermochromic materials, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 43 illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of a case, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 44A illustrates a case with a thermochromic sheet, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 44B illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of a thermochromic sheet, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 45 is a flowchart of another method for manufacturing a case with a color-changing material, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing a case with a color-changing material, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing a case with a thermochromic material, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a method of using a case that includes a color-changing material. -
FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheeting with a color-changing material, according to some embodiments. - Like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the drawings.
- To address the aforementioned problems, some embodiments provide a cord management system that secures the cord and prevents the cord from becoming tangled.
FIG. 1 illustrates components of an exemplarycord management system 100. The components of thecord management system 100 may include amagnetic strap 101, one or moremagnetic beads 102, and amagnetic material 103. Themagnetic strap 101 is described in more detail with respect toFIG. 6-12 below, themagnetic beads 102 are described in more detail with respect toFIG. 13-14 below. Themagnetic material 103 is described in more detail with respect toFIG. 15G below. - In some embodiments, the
cord management system 100 is provided to an end user as a kit that includes components that the end user assembles to form the cord management system. The process of assembling thecord management system 100 is described in more detail with respect toFIG. 15 below. In some embodiments, the kit includes a subset of the components illustrated inFIG. 1 . For example, thecord management system 100 may include: (1) themagnetic strap 101, (2) themagnetic strap 101 and themagnetic beads 102, (3) themagnetic strap 101 and themagnetic material 103, (4) themagnetic strap 101, themagnetic beads 102, and themagnetic material 103, or (5) themagnetic beads 102. - In some embodiments, only a subset of the
cord management system 100 is used to secure a cord and prevent the cord from becoming tangled. For example, the end user may choose one of several options to secure the cord using: (1) themagnetic strap 101, (2) themagnetic strap 101 and themagnetic beads 102, (3) themagnetic strap 101 and themagnetic material 103, (4) themagnetic strap 101, themagnetic beads 102, and themagnetic material 103, or (5) themagnetic beads 102. These options are described below. - Note that although a magnet may be considered a magnetic material, a magnetic material is not necessarily a magnet. Specifically, a magnetic material is a material or composition that produces a magnetic field in response to an applied magnetic field (e.g., a magnetic field produced by a magnet). The magnetic material may include one or more of a ferromagnetic material and a paramagnetic material.
- In some embodiments, the end user uses the
magnetic strap 101 to secure a cord. As illustrated inFIGS. 2A-2E , acord 201 is wrapped around themagnetic strap 101 substantially perpendicular to and/or otherwise across themagnetic strap 101 at any angle. In some embodiments, thecord 201 is a cord for earphones. Note that the term “earphones” is used in this specification to refer to any device (e.g., headphones, ear buds, etc.) that an end user places on or in the ears to produce sounds. For example, thecord 201 may include speakers (e.g., ear buds) 202 and 203, as illustrated inFIGS. 2A-2E . In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 101 is placed on an object and thecord 201 is wrapped around both the object and themagnetic strap 101 in a direction substantially perpendicular to and/or across the length of themagnetic strap 101. For example, the object may be anelectronic device 210, as illustrated inFIGS. 2A-2C . Similarly, the object may be a hand as illustrated inFIG. 2D-2E . - In some embodiments, after a desired length of the
cord 201 is wrapped around themagnetic strap 101, themagnetic strap 101 is folded over to form a loop around thecord 201 to secure thecord 201 to themagnetic strap 101. These embodiments are illustrated inFIG. 2B (e.g., an electronic device) andFIG. 2D (e.g., a hand). Once themagnetic strap 101 is secured around thecord 201, the object can be stored in a pocket, a bag, or a purse without thecord 201 becoming tangled or without thecord 201 becoming unwound from the object. In addition, once themagnetic strap 101 is secured around thecord 201, themagnetic strap 101 can be removed from the object and stored in a pocket, a bag, or a purse without thecord 201 becoming tangled or without thecord 201 becoming unwound from themagnetic strap 101. - Although
FIGS. 2B and 2D illustrate a cord that is completely secured by themagnetic strap 101, the end user may choose to wrap only a portion of thecord 201 in themagnetic strap 101. For example,FIG. 2G illustrates anend user 230 that is holding theelectric device 210 with the 202 and 203 inserted in his ears. As illustrated inspeakers FIG. 2G , thecord 201 is wound around theelectronic device 210 and themagnetic strap 101 several times and is secured with themagnetic strap 101. In this way, theend user 230 has reduced the length of thecord 201 that is free and dangling. In other words, the length of thecord 201 is such that theend user 230 can perform desired functions and move theelectronic device 210 without dislodging the 202 and 203 and without having too much slack on thespeakers cord 201. - In some embodiments, magnets located at magnetic attachment points 104 and 105 on the
magnetic strap 101 keep themagnetic strap 101 in the loop configuration when themagnetic strap 101 is folded over to form the loop. Note that the magnetic attachment points 104 and 105 may be replaced with other types of attachment mechanisms. For example, the attachment mechanism may include Velcro, adhesives, suction devices (e.g., suction cups), van der Waals force attachment mechanisms (e.g., “Gecko” tape), snaps, buttons, friction mechanisms, buckles, springs, bistable springs (e.g., a slap bracelet), a sleeve that inserts into a slot, a peg that is inserted into a hole, and hinges. - In some cases, the end user may desire to remove the
cord 201 from an electronic device onto which thecord 201 is attached and store thecord 201 separately from the electronic device. In these cases, it is highly desirable to prevent the separatedcord 201 from becoming tangled. Thus, in some embodiments, after thecord 201 is secured to themagnetic strap 101, themagnetic strap 101 is removed from the object. These embodiments are illustrated inFIGS. 2C and 2F . Since thecord 201 is secured to themagnetic strap 101, removing themagnetic strap 101 from the object removes thecord 201 from the object. When themagnetic strap 101 is removed from the object, thecord 201 remains looped around themagnetic strap 101. Thus, thecord 201 that is wrapped around themagnetic strap 101 does not become tangled when placed in a pocket, a bag, or a purse. - In some cases, after wrapping the
cord 201 around the electronic device so that the electronic device may be stored without thecord 201 becoming tangled, the end user may wish to use the electronic device again. Thus, in some embodiments, after thecord 201 is secured by themagnetic strap 101, thecord 201 is deployed from themagnetic strap 101. In some embodiments, thecord 201 is deployed from themagnetic strap 101 by pulling the end of thecord 201 in a direction substantially parallel to the length of the magnetic strap. For example,FIGS. 2H , 2J, and 2K illustrate the deployment of thecord 201 when thecord 201 is wrapped around theelectronic device 210. As illustrated inFIG. 2H , the end user pulls on the 202 and 203 in a direction substantially parallel to the length of thespeakers magnetic strap 101. As illustrated inFIG. 2J , the force that the end user exerts on thecord 201 causes themagnetic strap 101 to detach from the loop and become open. As the end user continues pulling on thecord 201, thecord 201 unwinds from theelectronic device 210, as illustrated inFIG. 2K . Note that the user may stop unwinding thecord 201 from the electronic device at any time. For example, user may partially deploy thecord 201 and secure thecord 201 using themagnetic strap 101 as illustrated inFIG. 5A . - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 101 is used to secure one or more of: drapery, drapery cords, power cords, extension cords, hoses, ropes, kite strings, fishing lines, and the like. - Although the
magnetic strap 101 may be used by itself as a cord management system, other components may be added to the cord management system to provide a different user experience. In some embodiments, the cord management system includes themagnetic strap 101 and one or more of themagnetic beads 102. Themagnetic beads 102 may be used for several purposes. In some embodiments, themagnetic beads 102 are used to assist in the wrapping of thecord 201 around theelectronic device 210 and themagnetic strap 101. In some embodiments, themagnetic beads 102 are used to keep the 202 and 203 coupled to each other when thespeakers cord 201 is wrapped around theelectronic device 210. In some embodiments, themagnetic beads 102 are used to secure the 202 and 203 to a predetermined point on thespeakers cord 201. In some embodiments, themagnetic beads 102 are used to secure excess cord after thecord 201 is wrapped around theelectronic device 210. In some embodiments, themagnetic beads 102 are used to secure the cord under the chin of an end user. These embodiments are described below. -
FIGS. 3A to 3E illustrates a process for managing a cord using themagnetic strap 101 and themagnetic beads 102, according to some embodiments. Note that themagnetic beads 102 may include one or more of 301, 302, 303, and 304, each having an embedded magnet, as described below. Also note that at least a subset of themagnetic beads 301, 302, 303, and 304 may be substituted for a magnetic material that is embedded in themagnetic beads 301, 302, 303, and 304. Furthermore, additional magnetic beads, above and beyond themagnetic beads 301, 302, 303, and 304, may be included in themagnetic beads cord management system 100. Among other things, these additional magnetic beads may be used as replacements for lost magnetic beads. - As illustrated in
FIG. 3A , aconnector 204 of the cord 201 (and/or the cord 201) is inserted into a cord-attachment mechanism 109 of themagnetic strap 101. Note that the term “connector” is used in this specification to refer to any type of connector or plug. For example, theconnector 204 may be an electrical connector (e.g., an audio connector, a video connector, a power connector, a computer connector, etc.) or non-electrical connector. Theconnector 204 of thecord 201 is then attached to acorresponding connector 211 on theelectronic device 210. Themagnetic strap 101 is then placed on theelectronic device 210 so that the length of themagnetic strap 101 is collinear with the direction in which theconnector 204 of the cord was inserted into the correspondingconnector 211 on theelectronic device 210. As illustrated inFIG. 3A , the correspondingconnector 211 on theelectronic device 210 is located at a top edge of theelectronic device 210. Thus, in this case, the length of themagnetic strap 101 is parallel to the length of theelectronic device 210. If, however, the correspondingconnector 211 of theelectronic device 210 were located at a side edge of theelectronic device 210, the length of themagnetic strap 101 may run in a direction perpendicular to the direction illustrated inFIG. 3A or at another angle other than the angle illustrated inFIG. 3A . - In some embodiments, a
magnetic bead 301 is attached to thecord 201 at a predetermined location on thecord 201. In some embodiments, the predetermined location is selected so that when thecord 201 is bent towards themagnetic attachment point 104, themagnetic bead 301 becomes magnetically attached to themagnetic strap 101 at themagnetic attachment point 104. Note that the term “magnetically attached” is defined below. Themagnetic bead 301 allows the end user to start wrapping thecord 201 around the electronic device and themagnetic strap 101 without needing to hold thecord 201 onto themagnetic strap 101 or theelectronic device 210, as illustrated inFIG. 3B . Note that these embodiments are optional. AlthoughFIGS. 3B-3E illustrate themagnetic bead 301 attached to thecord 201, themagnetic bead 301 may be omitted. For example, an experienced end user may be able to start wrapping thecord 201 around themagnetic strap 101 and theelectronic device 210 without the aid of themagnetic bead 301 and without needing to hold thecord 201 onto themagnetic strap 101 or theelectronic device 210. - The
cord 201 is then wrapped around themagnetic strap 101 and theelectronic device 210, as illustrated inFIGS. 3C-3E . In some embodiments, thecord 201 is wrapped around themagnetic strap 101 substantially perpendicular to a length of themagnetic strap 101. Note that if the length of themagnetic strap 101 runs in a direction perpendicular to the direction or at an angle other than the angle illustrated inFIGS. 3A-3E , thecord 201 is wrapped around the length of theelectronic device 210 so that thecord 201 is substantially perpendicular to themagnetic strap 101. -
FIG. 3D illustrates thecord 201 after it has been wrapped around theelectronic device 210. In some embodiments, 302 and 303 are attached on the cords for themagnetic beads 202 and 203 at a predetermined distance from thespeakers 202 and 203. In some embodiments, one of thespeakers 302 and 303 is substituted for magnetic material. In some embodiments, the magnets of themagnets 202 and 203 are used in lieu of thespeakers 302 and 303. In some embodiments, themagnets 302 and 303 are magnetically attached to each other so that themagnetic beads 202 and 203 are coupled to each other. By magnetically attaching thespeakers 302 and 303 to each other, the cord for each of themagnetic beads 202 and 203 has a reduced likelihood of becoming tangled with each other or with other parts of thespeakers cord 201. The predetermined distance may be selected so that the 302 and 303 are located on the cords just below themagnetic beads 202 and 203, as illustrated inspeakers FIG. 3D . As illustrated inFIG. 3E , after themagnetic strap 101 is folded over to form the loop, the free end of the cord 201 (i.e., the end attached to thespeakers 202 and 203) may be allowed to dangle freely. As illustrated inFIG. 3F , after themagnetic strap 101 is folded over to form the loop, the free end of thecord 201 may be folded over so that the 302 and 303 are magnetically attached to themagnetic beads magnetic attachment point 105. As illustrated inFIG. 3F , the 202 and 203 no longer dangle.speakers - In some instances, after the
magnetic strap 101 is folded over into the loop configuration, there may be a portion of thecord 201 that is not secured by the magnetic strap 101 (i.e., a portion of the cord from themagnetic strap 101 to thespeakers 202 and 203). If the portion of thecord 201 that is not secured by themagnetic strap 101 is long, thecord 201 may become caught on other objects (such as when placed in a pocket, a bag, or a purse). For example, the final wrap of thecord 201 may place the 202 and 203 on front side of the electronic device 210 (i.e., the opposite side of thespeakers electronic device 210 illustrated inFIG. 3E ). To address these cases, in some embodiments, amagnetic bead 304 is attached on thecord 201 so that when thecord 201 is wrapped around theelectronic device 210, themagnetic bead 304 is located on the front side of theelectronic device 210. These embodiments are illustrated inFIG. 3G . The 302 and 303 are then magnetically attached to themagnetic beads magnetic bead 304. Note that the end user may slide and/or otherwise readjust the 302 and 303 up and down themagnetic beads cord 201 so that the 302, 303, and 304 can be magnetically attached to each other. Although themagnetic beads 202 and 203 may still dangle, the amount of thespeakers cord 201 that is dangling can be reduced. - In some cases, the end user may not wish to fold over the
cord 201 to secure the free end of the cord 201 (e.g., as illustrated inFIG. 3F ). In these cases, themagnetic bead 304 may be attached on thecord 201 so that when thecord 201 is wrapped around theelectronic device 210, themagnetic bead 304 is located on the back side of theelectronic device 210, as illustrated inFIG. 3H . The 302 and 303 are then magnetically attached to themagnetic beads magnetic bead 304. Note that the end user may slide the 302 and 303 up and down themagnetic beads cord 201 so that the 302, 303, and 304 can be magnetically attached to each other. Although themagnetic beads 202 and 203 may still dangle, the amount of thespeakers cord 201 that is dangling can be reduced. - In some cases, the end user may not wish to use the
magnetic strap 101 to secure the cord. In these cases, the end user may magnetically attach the 302 and 303 to magnetic material that is attached to themagnetic beads electronic device 210. The use of magnetic material in conjunction with theelectronic device 210 is described in more detail below. - In some embodiments, the end user slides the
302 and 304 so that free end of themagnetic beads cord 201 does not slide back through the loop (e.g., as illustrated inFIG. 3J ). In some embodiments, the end user wraps a portion of the free end of thecord 201 over itself (e.g., in a shape of a bow tie, as illustrated inFIG. 3K ) so that the amount of thecord 201 that is left dangling is reduced. The end user then secures the wrapped portion of the free end of thecord 201 using themagnetic strap 101 as illustrated inFIG. 3K . - When deploying the
cord 201, themagnetic strap 101 flips back to the open position (i.e., themagnetic strap 101 lays substantially flat on the electronic device 210), as illustrated inFIGS. 2J and 2K . - Note that the dimensions of the
magnetic strap 101 may be selected to accommodate cords of varying lengths and thicknesses. The dimensions of themagnetic strap 101 are also selected to accommodate objects (e.g., portable electronic devices, etc.) of varying sizes.FIGS. 20A to 20E illustrate a process for managing a cord, according to some embodiments. The process illustrated inFIGS. 20A to 20E is similar to the process illustrated inFIGS. 3A to 3E , except that themagnetic strap 101 is attached to an electronic device 2001 having a different shape and size as compared to theelectronic device 210. - As illustrated in
FIG. 20A , theconnector 2006 is attached to the electronic device 2001. The cord 2005 (e.g., the cord 201) is then wrapped around themagnetic strap 101 and the electronic device 2001, as illustrated inFIGS. 20B-20D . In some embodiments, thecord 2005 is wrapped around themagnetic strap 101 substantially perpendicular to and/or otherwise across themagnetic strap 101 at any angle. - In some embodiments, the magnetic bead 2013 (e.g., the magnetic bead 301) is first magnetically attached to the magnet of the
magnetic strap 101 before thecord 2005 is wrapped around themagnetic strap 101 and the electronic device 2001. These embodiments are illustrated inFIG. 20B . By magnetically coupling themagnetic bead 2013 to themagnetic strap 101, a user does not need to hold thecord 2005 to the electronic device 2001 or to themagnetic strap 101 while wrapping thecord 2005 around the electronic device 2001. -
FIG. 20D illustrates thecord 2005 after it has been wrapped around the electronic device 2001. Note that inFIG. 20D , the cords for the 2011 and 2012 do not include magnetic beads. Therefore, thespeakers 2011 and 2012 are not coupled to each other and hang freely, as illustrated inspeakers FIGS. 20D and 20E . - In some embodiments, after the
cord 2005 has been wrapped around the electronic device 2001, themagnetic strap 101 is formed into a loop (i.e., the first mode of operation). These embodiments are illustrated inFIGS. 20D , 20E, and 21A. - When deploying the
cord 2005, themagnetic strap 101 flips back to the open position (i.e., themagnetic strap 101 lays substantially flat on theelectronic device 210. This process for deploying thecord 2005 from the electronic device 2001 is illustrated inFIGS. 21A-21C , according to some embodiments. InFIG. 21A , a user grabs the speakers (or thecord 2005 near the speakers) and pulls thecord 2005 in a direction substantially parallel to the length of themagnetic strap 101. The force that thecord 2005 exerts against the magnets at the magnetic attachment points 104 and 105 causes the magnets to be detached from each other, as illustrated inFIG. 21B . InFIG. 21C , thecord 2005 is fully deployed from themagnetic strap 101. - Although the discussion above describes deploying a wrapped cord from the
magnetic strap 101 by pulling on the cord in a direction substantially parallel to the length of themagnetic strap 101, in some embodiments, a wrapped cord is deployed from themagnetic strap 101 by pulling on the cord in a direction not parallel to the length of themagnetic strap 101. For example, if themagnetic strap 101 is detached from theelectronic devices 210 and 2001, a user may deploy a wrapped cord by pulling in a direction perpendicular to the length of the magnetic strap. Alternatively, the user may also pull the magnetic attachment points 104 and 105 away from each other by pulling on the strap directly. - In some embodiments, the
302 and 303 are used to secure themagnetic beads cord 201 when thecord 201 is deployed. For example,FIG. 5A illustrates anend user 501 using thecord 201 with theelectronic device 210, according to some embodiments. As illustrated inFIG. 5A , thecord 201 includes acord segment 204 coupled to thespeaker 202 and acord segment 205 coupled to thespeaker 203. Note that 204 and 205 may also be referred to as speaker cords. Thecord segments 204 and 205 are coupled to thecord segments cord 201 atpoint 206. When the 202 and 203 are inserted into the ears of thespeakers end user 501, the 204 and 205 may dangle loosely. If the end user is moving around (e.g., running, walking, etc.), thecord segments 204 and 205 may swing around and get caught in clothing and/or become dislodged from the ears ofcord segments end user 501. To prevent the 204 and 205 from dangling, thecord segments 302 and 303 are moved to a position below the chin of themagnetic beads end user 501 and are magnetically coupled to each other, as illustrated inFIG. 5B . In the configuration illustrated inFIG. 5B , theend user 501 may slide the 302 and 303 up and down themagnetic beads 204 and 205 to adjust the amount of thecord segments 204 and 205 that are unsecured.cord segments - Although
FIGS. 5A and 5B illustrate a partially-deployedcord 201, thecord 201 may also be fully-deployed. The fully-deployed cord is illustrated inFIGS. 5C and 5D , which are analogous toFIGS. 5A and 5B , respectively. - In some embodiments, at least one of the
301, 302, 303, and 304 include a clip that allows the magnetic bead to be clipped onto an object. For example, the object may be clothing (e.g., a shirt, a pants pocket, etc.) or a purse strap.magnetic beads - In some embodiments, to assist in the deployment of the
cord 201, themagnetic material 103 is attached to the back of theelectronic device 210 so that when themagnetic strap 101 is in the open position, themagnetic attachment point 105 of themagnetic strap 101 is magnetically attached to themagnetic material 103. These embodiments are illustrated inFIGS. 4A , 4B, and 4C. InFIG. 4A , an end user grabs the speakers and pulls thecord 201 in a direction substantially parallel to the length of themagnetic strap 101. The force that thecord 201 exerts against the magnets at the magnetic attachment points 104 and 105 causes the magnets to be detached from each other so that themagnetic strap 101 no longer forms the loop, as illustrated inFIG. 4B . The force that thecord 201 exerts against the magnets causes themagnetic strap 101 to return to its natural configuration (e.g., the flat configuration). Themagnetic strap 101 is also magnetically attracted to themagnetic material 103, thereby assisting in the deployment of themagnetic strap 101. In other words, the magnetic force between themagnetic attachment point 105 of themagnetic strap 101 and themagnetic material 103 pulls themagnetic attachment point 105 towards themagnetic material 103. Themagnetic material 103 also holds themagnetic strap 101 to theelectronic device 210 so that the strap does not move while in the open position. InFIG. 4C , thecord 201 is fully deployed from themagnetic strap 101. After thecord 201 is fully deployed, the end user may fold the strap over, as illustrated inFIG. 4D . - In some embodiments, the
magnetic material 103 is attached to theelectronic device 210 so that when themagnetic strap 101 is in the open position, themagnetic attachment point 104 of themagnetic strap 101 is magnetically attached to themagnetic material 103. These embodiments are used to attach themagnetic strap 101 to theelectronic device 210 when themagnetic strap 101 is folded into the loop configuration. - Note that the magnetic material may be attached to the
electronic device 210 using adhesives, suction devices (e.g., suction cups), Velcro, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms (e.g., “Gecko” tape), snaps, buttons, and the like. Also note that the magnetic material may be molded into theelectronic device 210, a back panel of theelectronic device 210, and/or a case for theelectronic device 210. Furthermore, that the magnetic material may be substituted for an adhesive applied to either or both of theelectronic device 210 and/or themagnetic strap 101, suction devices (e.g., suction cups) attached to either or both of theelectronic device 210 and/or themagnetic strap 101, Velcro attached to both theelectronic device 210 and themagnetic strap 101, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms (e.g., “Gecko” tape) attached to either or both of theelectronic device 210 and/or themagnetic strap 101, snaps attached to either or both of theelectronic device 210 and/or themagnetic strap 101, buttons attached to either or both of theelectronic device 210 and/or themagnetic strap 101, and hinges attached to either or both of theelectronic device 210 and/or themagnetic strap 101. - In some embodiments, the
cord management system 100 includes themagnetic strap 101, themagnetic beads 102, and themagnetic material 103. The various embodiments described above may be used in combination to secure thecord 201. - The design and the composition of
magnetic strap 101, themagnetic beads 102, and themagnetic material 103 are described in more detail below. - In some embodiments, the
cord management system 100 includes themagnetic beads 102. In these embodiments, the magnetic beads are attached to thecord 201 at locations so that when thecord 201 is wrapped around an object (e.g., the electronic device 210), two or more magnetic beads at different locations on thecord 201 are magnetically attached to each other so that thecord 201 cannot become unwrapped from the object. For example,FIG. 3G illustrates 302, 303, and 304 (all of which are located at different locations on the cord 201) are magnetically attached to each other.magnetic beads -
FIGS. 6A , 6B, and 6C illustrate top, perspective and side views, respectively, of amagnetic strap 601, according to some embodiments. Note that themagnetic strap 601 is one particular embodiment of themagnetic strap 101 described above. In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 601 includes a magnet 602 at alocation 604 on themagnetic strap 601 and amagnet 603 at alocation 605 on themagnetic strap 601. Themagnets 602 and 603 may include any element or composition that is capable of producing a magnetic field. For example, themagnets 602 and 603 may include one or more of magnetic metallic elements (e.g., iron, cobalt, nickel, etc.), composite magnets (e.g., ceramic or ferrite magnets, alnico magnets, ticonal magnets, injection molded magnets, flexible magnets), rare earth magnets (e.g., samarium-cobalt magnets, neodymium-iron-boron magnets, etc.), electromagnets, sets of any of these magnets, or any material or composition that produces a magnetic field. In some embodiments, themagnets 602 and 603 are Neodymium magnets. In some embodiments, the Neodymium magnets are a grade N42. - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 601 includes only one magnet and a magnetic material. For example, themagnetic strap 601 may include the magnet 602 at thelocation 604 and a magnetic material at thelocation 605. Alternatively, themagnetic strap 601 may include a magnetic material at thelocation 604 and themagnet 603 at thelocation 605. Note that a magnetic material is a material or composition that produces a magnetic field in response to an applied magnetic field. The magnetic material may include one or more of a ferromagnetic material and a paramagnetic material. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is low-carbon steel. Also note that this specification refers to themagnets 602 and 603 as “magnets” even though one of themagnets 602 and 603 may be a magnetic material. Furthermore, any combination of magnets and magnetic material that allows for the magnetic attachments described herein to function may be used. - In some embodiments, the
magnets 602 and 603 are solid magnets. In some embodiments, themagnets 602 and 603 are selected from the group consisting of donut (ring) magnets, horseshoe-shaped (U-shaped) magnets, cylindrical magnets, disc-shaped magnets, rectangular magnets, and the like. In some embodiments, themagnets 602 and 603 are sets of magnets. The selection of the size and shape of themagnets 602 and 603 may depend on factors including, but not limited to, a desired magnetic strength, a desired form factor, a desired aesthetic, and the manufacturing process used to produce themagnetic strap 601. - In some embodiments, the
magnets 602 and 603 are embedded in themagnetic strap 601. In these embodiments, themagnets 602 and 603 are either enclosed or partially enclosed by the material that forms themagnetic strap 601. As illustrated inFIG. 6C , the material that forms themagnetic strap 601 forms a gradual contour around themagnets 602 and 603. The contour formed by the material of themagnetic strap 601 around themagnets 602 and 603 may conform to the shape of themagnetic strap 601. For example, as illustrated inFIGS. 6A-6C , the material enclosing themagnets 602 and 603 forms a rectangular region. This rectangular region serves at least two purposes: to hold themagnets 602 and 603 in place and to provide a flat surface onto which themagnets 602 and 603 can be magnetically attached to each other. Note that the flat surface allows themagnets 602 and 603 to be magnetically attached to each other better than a surface that is not flat (e.g., a crowned surface). - In some embodiments, the
magnets 602 and 603 are configured so that opposite magnetic poles of each magnet are perpendicular to the top (or bottom) surface of themagnetic strap 601. For example, the north pole of the magnet 602 is configured to be perpendicular to a first surface of themagnetic strap 601 whereas the south pole of themagnet 603 is configured to be perpendicular to the first surface of themagnetic strap 601. In other embodiments, and as noted above, only one of themagnets 602 and 603 is a magnet and the other magnet is a magnetic material. Again, any combination of magnets and magnetic material that allows for the magnetic attachments described herein to function may be used. - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 601 includes asegment 606 that is located between themagnets 602 and 603. In some embodiments, thesegment 606 also includes the portion of themagnetic strap 601 that includes themagnets 602 and 603. In some embodiments, thesegment 606 is composed of a material that is substantially memoryless. In some embodiments, the memoryless material is an elastic polymer. A material that is memoryless is a material that does not exhibit elastic hysteresis, which causes a material to behave differently when a loading force that was exerted on the material is removed. In the case of a material that does not have elastic hysteresis, the application of a loading force and a subsequent removal of the loading force does not cause the material to “remember” that the material was previously loaded. Thus, the material returns to its original shape and/or configuration when the loading force is removed. In some embodiments, thesegment 606 is composed of a memoryless material that causes themagnetic strap 601 to return to a substantially flat configuration when unloaded (or when the loading force is less than a restoring force of the memoryless material). These embodiments are illustrated inFIGS. 6A-6C . Note that when an external force is applied to the memoryless material, the memoryless material generates a restoring force that opposes the external force. In other words, the restoring force tries to keep the memoryless material in its natural configuration (e.g., a flat configuration). For example, consider the application of an external force to thesegment 606 that causes thesegment 606 to form a loop. When the external force is removed, thesegment 606 returns to its natural configuration (e.g., as illustrated inFIGS. 6A-6C ). In some embodiments, the restoring force is a function of the displacement (e.g., stretching, bending, etc.) of the memoryless material. In these embodiments, the external force required to change the configuration of the memoryless material varies as a function of the displacement. - In some embodiments, the
segment 606 is composed of a polymer. In some embodiments, the polymer is selected from the group consisting of silicone and an elastomer (e.g., thermoplastic elastomer). In some embodiments, the polymer is resistant to dust. These polymers may be used in manufacturing processes such as injection molding, casting, compression molding, and die cutting. The type of manufacturing process selected may depend on factors such as a desired manufacturing volume, manufacturing time, and manufacturing costs. Additionally, the type of manufacturing process selected may depend on a desired aesthetic design of themagnetic strap 601. For example, if the aesthetic design of themagnetic strap 601 requires that the magnets 602-603 are to be encapsulated in the material of themagnetic strap 601, an injection molding process may be used. In some embodiments, a two-shot injection molding process is used to manufacture themagnetic strap 601. - In some embodiments, the
segment 606 is composed of a fabric. For example, the fabric may be a Neoprene fabric, leather, silk, cotton, denim, foil, Mylar, and the like. - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 601 includes asegment 607. In some embodiments, thesegment 607 includes the portion of themagnetic strap 601 that includes themagnet 603. In some embodiments, thesegment 607 is composed of an elastic material. The elastic polymer may be any of the polymers discussed above with respect to thesegment 606. In some embodiments, thesegment 607 is composed of a fabric (e.g. Neoprene). - In some embodiments, the
segment 607 includes ahandle 610. In some embodiments, thehandle 610 is formed from the same material as thesegment 607. Thehandle 610 is a raised portion or high friction of material of themagnetic strap 601 that allows a user to grab onto the end of themagnetic strap 601 while attaching themagnetic strap 601 to a cord (or connector) using the cord-attachment mechanism 609. Without thehandle 610, the fingers of the end user may slip off of themagnetic strap 601 while attaching themagnetic strap 601 to a cord (and/or a connector of the cord) using the cord-attachment mechanism 609. A high friction surface for thehandle 610 may be created - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 601 includes asegment 608. In some embodiments, thesegment 608 includes the portion of themagnetic strap 601 that includes the magnet 602. In some embodiments, thesegment 608 is composed of an elastic material. In some embodiments, the elastic material is an elastic polymer. The elastic polymer may be any of the polymers discussed above with respect to thesegment 606. In some embodiments, thesegment 608 is composed of a fabric (e.g., Neoprene). - In some embodiments, the
606, 607, and 608 are composed of the same polymer. In some embodiments, thesegments 606, 607, and 608 are composed of different, but compatible, polymers. In some embodiments, thesegments segment 608 is composed of a fabric. - In some embodiments, the
segment 607 includes a cord-attachment mechanism 609 that is used to attach themagnetic strap 601 to a cord (and/or a connector of the cord). The cord-attachment mechanism is described in more detail below with respect toFIGS. 10 and 11 . - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 601 operates in at least two modes of operation, as described above. In a first mode of operation, themagnets 602 and 603 are magnetically attached to each other so that thesegment 606 of themagnetic strap 601 located between themagnets 602 and 603 forms a loop configured to secure a cord that is wrapped around the magnetic strap 601 (e.g., seeFIG. 2B ). In the first mode of operation, the attractive magnetic force between themagnets 602 and 603 is greater than any restoring force exerted by the material of themagnetic strap 601 that causes themagnetic strap 601 to return to its natural configuration (e.g., flat configuration). Thus, thesegment 606 remains in a loop until an external force is applied to thesegment 606 that causes themagnets 602 and 603 to be magnetically detached and/or otherwise separated from each other. In a second mode of operation, themagnets 602 and 603 are magnetically detached and/or otherwise separated from each other (e.g., themagnets 602 and 603 are no longer attached to each other). For example, in the second mode of operation, themagnetic strap 601 may be substantially flat (e.g., seeFIGS. 6A , 6B, and 6C). - Note that the term “magnetically attached,” when applied to two magnets, refers to two magnets being attached to each other by an attractive magnetic force between the two magnets. In contrast, the term “magnetically detached,” when applied to two magnets, refers to two magnets that are no longer attached to each other. Although the two magnets may no longer be magnetically attached to each other, the two magnets may still be “magnetically coupled” to each other. In other words, each magnet may feel a magnetic force generated by the magnetic field of the other magnet. This magnetic force is a function of the distance between the two magnets. Thus, in some embodiments, the strength of the
magnets 602 and 603 are selected so that the magnetic force between themagnets 602 and 603 is greater than any restoring force exerted by the material of the magnetic strap only when themagnets 602 and 603 are a predefined distance from each other. When themagnets 602 and 603 are at a distance greater than the predefined distance from each other, the magnetic force between themagnets 602 and 603 is less than the restoring force exerted by the material. Thus, themagnetic strap 601 returns to its natural configuration (e.g., the flat configuration illustrated inFIGS. 6A-6C ). When themagnets 602 and 603 are at a distance less than or equal to the predefined distance from each other, the magnetic force between themagnets 602 and 603 exceeds the restoring force exerted by the material. Thus, themagnets 602 and 603 are drawn to each other and become magnetically attached to each other. - Also note that this specification refers to two magnets (or magnets and magnetic materials) being “magnetically attached” to each other even if the magnets are separated by intermediary materials. For example, even though the material of the magnetic strap 601 (e.g., an elastic polymer) may enclose the
magnets 602 and 603, themagnets 602 and 603 are magnetically attached to each other when the surface(s) of material enclosing themagnets 602 and 603 touch each other. - In some embodiments, the second mode of operation is used when deploying (e.g., unwrapping) a cord that is wrapped around the
magnetic strap 601. These embodiments are discussed above with respect toFIGS. 2H-2K . - In some embodiments, the second mode of operation is used when wrapping a cord around the
magnetic strap 601. In some embodiments, the cord is wrapped substantially perpendicular to and/or otherwise across themagnetic strap 601 at any angle (e.g., seeFIGS. 2A-2B ). - In some embodiments, the second mode of operation is used when a user uses the cord. For example, if the cord is a cord for headphones and the
magnetic strap 601 is attached to a music player, the user may use the deployed cord to listen to music. - In some embodiments, the length of the
segment 607 and the location of the cord-attachment mechanism 609 within thesegment 607 are selected so that when themagnetic strap 601 is placed on an object, thesegment 606 lies flat on a surface of the object (e.g., a portable electronic device) (e.g., seeFIG. 2A ). - In some embodiments, the length of the
magnetic strap 601 is selected based on one or more of: a range of lengths of cords that are to be secured using themagnetic strap 601, a range of thicknesses of cords that are to be secured using themagnetic strap 601, a number of times the cord will wrap around themagnetic strap 601, dimensions of objects on which themagnetic strap 601 is to be placed, the location of the magnets 602 and/or 603, whether a case is used, and a number of times the cord will wrap around themagnetic strap 601 and an object (and a case for the object). In some embodiments, the minimum length of themagnetic strap 601 is 1.5 inches. In some embodiments, the length of themagnetic strap 601 is between 1.5 inches and 3.19 inches. In some embodiments, the length of themagnetic strap 601 is 3.02 inches. - Note that the width of the
magnetic strap 601 is typically bounded by the minimum manufacturable width of the material used in themagnetic strap 601. However, the actual width used for themagnetic strap 601 is typically selected to be at least the size (e.g., the diameter) of themagnets 602 and 603 in embodiments in which the magnets are embedded in themagnetic strap 601. In embodiments in which themagnets 602 and 603 are attached to themagnetic strap 601 by other means, themagnetic strap 601 may be narrower than themagnets 602 and 603. The width of themagnetic strap 601 also affects the resistance of themagnetic strap 601 to twisting (or torsional) forces about a longitudinal axis (i.e., the length) of themagnetic strap 601. For example, if themagnetic strap 601 is wider, themagnetic strap 601 has less tendency to twist (e.g., when deploying a cord). In some embodiments, the width of themagnetic strap 601 is between 0.25 inches and 0.52 inches. In some embodiments, the width of themagnetic strap 601 is 0.51 inches. In some embodiments, the width of themagnetic strap 601 is at least 0.25 inches. - The thickness of the
magnetic strap 601 is typically bounded by the minimum manufacturable thickness of the material used in themagnetic strap 601. The thickness of themagnetic strap 601 also affects the resistance of themagnetic strap 601 to twisting (or torsional) forces about a longitudinal axis (i.e., the length) of themagnetic strap 601. For example, if themagnetic strap 601 is wider, themagnetic strap 601 has less tendency to twist (e.g., when deploying a cord). In some embodiments, the thickness of themagnetic strap 601 is between 0.01 inches and 0.19 inches. In some embodiments, the minimum thickness of themagnetic strap 601 is 0.01 inches. In some embodiments, the thickness of themagnetic strap 601 in the center of thesegment 606 is 0.06 inches. In some embodiments, the thickness of themagnetic strap 601 enclosing themagnets 602 and 603 is 0.11 inches. - In some embodiments, the strength of the
magnets 602 and 603 are selected to provide a predefined attractive magnetic force between themagnets 602 and 603 when the magnet 602 is magnetically attached to themagnet 603. When the magnet 602 is magnetically attached to themagnet 603 and a decoupling force (e.g., an external force) that is less than the predefined threshold is exerted against the predefined attractive magnetic force between themagnets 602 and 603, the magnets remains magnetically attached to each other. When the magnet 602 is magnetically attached to themagnet 603 and a decoupling force that is greater than or equal to the predefined threshold is exerted against the predefined attractive magnetic force between the magnets, the magnets are magnetically detached from each other. - The predefined threshold is a function of several factors. These factors include the strengths, size, number, shape, and surface area of the
magnets 602 and 603, the material of themagnetic strap 601, and the type of decoupling force exerted against themagnets 602 and 603. The strengths of themagnets 602 and 603 determine the strength of the attractive magnetic force between themagnets 602 and 603. As described above, the strength of the attractive magnetic force between themagnets 602 and 603 is a function of the distance between themagnets 602 and 603. Thus, the closer themagnets 602 and 603 are to each other, the stronger the attractive magnetic force. The material of themagnetic strap 601, the material of the cord wrapped within themagnetic strap 601, the length of the cord, the diameter of the cord, and the number of loops of the cord that are wrapped within themagnetic strap 601, and the thickness of themagnetic strap 601 determine the magnitude of the restoring force. As described above, the magnitude of the restoring force may be a function of the displacement of the material. For example, the restoring force may be greater when the material of the magnetic strap is folded over so that themagnets 602 and 603 are magnetically attached to each other than if the material were only bent slightly. The type of decoupling force exerted against themagnets 602 and 603 may include an impulse force (or a force applied during a short but finite time interval) and a continuous force that is either constant or variable. - For a decoupling force that is continuously exerted against the attractive magnetic force between the
magnets 602 and 603, the decoupling force required to detach themagnets 602 and 603 so that they do not become magnetically attached again is a function of the distance between themagnets 602 and 603 and of the restoring force of the material of themagnetic strap 601. As the distance between themagnets 602 and 603 increases, the attractive magnetic force decreases and the decoupling force required is decreased. When a predetermined distance between themagnets 602 and 603 is reached, the restoring force of the material of themagnetic strap 601 exceeds the attractive magnetic force. At this point, themagnets 602 and 603, while still magnetically coupled to each other, cannot pull themagnets 602 and 603 back together. Accordingly, the decoupling force is no longer necessary because the restoring force of the material of themagnetic strap 601 causes themagnetic strap 601 to return to its natural configuration. An example of a decoupling force that is continuously exerted is a force that is generated by a hand that is pulling themagnets 602 and 603 apart from each other. - For a decoupling force that is an impulse (or that is applied during a short but finite time interval) exerted against the attractive magnetic force between the
magnets 602 and 603, the decoupling force required to detach themagnets 602 and 603 so that they do not become magnetically attached again must impart at least enough momentum to the magnets 602 and/or 603 such that distance between themagnets 602 and 603 reaches the predetermined distance at which the restoring force of the material of themagnetic strap 601 exceeds the attractive magnetic force. For example, consider a decoupling force that is an impulse that does not impart enough momentum to the magnets 602 and/or 603 such that the distance between themagnets 602 and 603 reaches the predetermined distance. After the decoupling force is applied and themagnets 602 and 603 are detached from each other, the attractive magnetic force between themagnets 602 and 603 act against the imparted momentum and slows the partingmagnets 602 and 603 until the momentum of the magnets 602 and/or 603 reaches zero. Since themagnets 602 and 603 have not reached the predetermined distance by the time the momentum of the magnets 602 and/or 603 reaches zero, the attractive magnetic force pulls themagnets 602 and 603 back toward each other so that they become magnetically attached again. An example of a decoupling force that is an impulse is a force generated when a wrapped cord is pulled away from the magnetic strap 601 (e.g., seeFIGS. 2H-2K ). - In some embodiments, each of the
magnets 602 and 603 are Neodymium donut-shaped magnets having a grade of N42, an outer diameter of 0.375 inches, an inner diameter of 0.125 inches, and a thickness of 0.0625 inches. In some embodiments, the thickness of themagnets 602 and 603 is between 0.0625 inches and 0.2 inches. In some embodiments, the diameter of themagnets 602 and 603 are between 0.3 inches and 0.375 inches. Note that the combination of the grade (i.e., the composition of materials, wherein a higher number for the grade indicates a higher magnetic strength per unit volume), the diameters, the shape, and the thickness of a magnet determines the magnetic strength of the magnet. The magnetic strength of a larger magnet (e.g., larger surface area, diameter, and/or thickness) having a lower grade (e.g., lower “N” number) may have greater magnetic strength than a smaller magnet with a higher grade. For example, Neodymium magnets have the following grades, ordered from lowest to highest strength, N28, N30, N33, N35, N38, N40, N42, N45, N48, N50, and N52. A large N28 magnet may be stronger than a small N52 magnet. Also note that the effective magnetic strength of the magnets may be affected by the properties of the material of themagnetic strap 601. For example, if themagnets 602 and 603 are encapsulated in a thicker material, the effective magnetic strength of themagnets 602 and 603 is reduced. Similarly, if themagnets 602 and 603 are encapsulated in a material that suppresses or otherwise impedes a portion of the magnetic fields from themagnets 602 and 603, the effective magnetic strength of themagnets 602 and 603 is reduced. Furthermore, note that the selection of the magnetic strength of themagnets 602 and 603 also depends on the elasticity of the material used for themagnetic strap 601. For example, when a less elastic material (i.e., a more rigid material) is used in themagnetic strap 601, the restoring force of the elastic material is greater (i.e., the material is more rigid and resists changes to its natural configuration) and stronger magnets are required to hold themagnets 602 and 603 together. - In some embodiments, each of the
magnets 602 and 603 are Neodymium step-shaped (e.g., step-layered) magnets. - In some embodiments, the location and the distance of the
magnets 602 and 603 on themagnetic strap 601 is determined based at least in part on the length of the strap, the type of objects onto which the magnetic strap is to be used, the elasticity of the material of themagnetic strap 601, and a length of a cord. In some embodiments, the minimum distance between themagnets 602 and 603 on themagnetic strap 601 is 0.5 inches. In some embodiments, the distance between themagnets 602 and 603 is between 0.5 inches to 2.1 inches. In some embodiments, the distance between themagnets 602 and 603 is 1.38 inches. - In some embodiments, the durometer (i.e., the hardness, also referred to as the “Shore durometer”) of the material of the
magnetic strap 601 is at least 10. In some embodiments, the durometer of the material of themagnetic strap 601 in the 607 and 608 is 40 and the durometer of the material of thesegments magnetic strap 601 in thesegment 606 is 60. In some embodiments, the durometer of the material of themagnetic strap 601 in the 607 and 608 is 20 and the durometer of the material of thesegments magnetic strap 601 in thesegment 606 is 60. In some embodiments, the durometer of the material of themagnetic strap 601 in the 607 and 608 is 20 and the durometer of the material of thesegments magnetic strap 601 in thesegment 606 is 40. - Thus, the selection of material for the magnetic strap 601 (e.g., the segments 606-608) and the selection of the strengths, size, number, the distance between the
magnets 602 and 603, shape, and surface area of themagnets 602 and 603 depends on the aforementioned factors. Furthermore, the selection of the materials for themagnetic strap 601 and the strengths of themagnets 602 and 603 are based on factors including the ease of deployment of the cord (e.g., the amount of force required to free the cord from themagnetic strap 601, etc.) and the prevention of the accidental deployment of the cord (e.g., from jostling in a bag or a purse, a pocket, etc.). - In some embodiments, the
location 605 is selected so that when a connector for a cord is inserted into the cord-attachment mechanism 609 and the connector is inserted into an electronic device, themagnetic strap 601 lies substantially flat on the electronic device. - Note that although the discussion of the
magnetic strap 601 refers to the magnet 602 and themagnet 603, each of themagnets 602 and 603 may include a set of magnets. Also note that, one of themagnets 602 and 603 may be replaced with a magnetic material, as described above. In some embodiments, the magnet 602 and themagnet 603 are replaced with an attachment mechanism selected from the group consisting of Velcro, adhesives, suction cups, and a van der Waals force attachment mechanism. -
FIGS. 7A , 7B, and 7C illustrate top, perspective, and side views, respectively, of amagnetic strap 701, according to some embodiments. Themagnetic strap 701 is similar to themagnetic strap 601, so only the differences are discussed. Themagnetic strap 701 includes amagnet 702 at alocation 704 on themagnetic strap 701 and amagnet 703 at alocation 705 on themagnetic strap 701. Themagnetic strap 701 also includes a cord-attachment mechanism 709. - In some embodiments, the
702 and 703 are embedded in themagnets magnetic strap 701. In these embodiments, the 702 and 703 are either enclosed or partially enclosed by the material that forms themagnets magnetic strap 701. As illustrated inFIG. 7C , the material that forms themagnetic strap 701 forms a gradual contour around the 702 and 703. The contour formed by the material of themagnets magnetic strap 701 around the 702 and 703 may conform to the shape of themagnets magnetic strap 701. For example, as illustrated inFIGS. 7A-7C , the material enclosing the 702 and 703 forms a gradual contour from the center of themagnets 702 and 703 to the center of themagnets segment 706. Thus, in contrast to the flat surface above themagnets 602 and 603 illustrated inFIGS. 6A-6C , a crown is formed at the center of the 702 and 703. Although the crown may be more aesthetically appealing, the crown reduces the surface area on which themagnets 702 and 703 can be magnetically attached to each other such that magnets of greater magnetic strength may be required.magnets - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 701 includes asegment 706 that is located between the 702 and 703. In some embodiments, themagnets segment 706 also includes the portion of themagnetic strap 701 that includes the 702 and 703. In some embodiments, themagnets segment 706 is composed of a material that is substantially memoryless, as discussed above with respect to thesegment 606 inFIGS. 6A-6C . - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 701 includes asegment 707. In some embodiments, thesegment 707 includes the portion of themagnetic strap 701 that includes themagnet 703. In some embodiments, thesegment 707 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to thesegment 607 inFIGS. 6A-6C . In some embodiments, thesegment 707 is composed of an elastic polymer. - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 701 includes asegment 708. In some embodiments, thesegment 708 includes the portion of themagnetic strap 701 that includes themagnet 702. In some embodiments, thesegment 708 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to thesegment 608 inFIGS. 6A-6C . In some embodiments, thesegment 708 is composed of an elastic polymer. - In some embodiments, the
segment 707 includes a cord-attachment mechanism that is used to attach themagnetic strap 701 to a cord (and/or a connector for the cord), as described above with respect to the cord-attachment mechanism 609 inFIGS. 6A-6C . -
FIGS. 8A , 8B, and 8C illustrate top, perspective, and side views, respectively, of amagnetic strap 801, according to some embodiments. Themagnetic strap 801 is similar to themagnetic strap 601, so only the differences are discussed. Themagnetic strap 801 includes 802 and 804 at amagnets location 806 on themagnetic strap 801 and 803 and 805 at amagnets location 807 on themagnetic strap 801. In some embodiments, the magnets 802-805 are attached to the surface of themagnetic strap 801. In some embodiments, the material of themagnetic strap 801 covers all but one surface of the magnets 802-805 (e.g., seeFIGS. 8D and 8E ). In some embodiments, the material of themagnetic strap 801 covers all of the surfaces of the magnets 802-805. Note that although the discussion of themagnetic strap 801 refers to the 802, 803, 804, and 805, each of themagnets 802, 803, 804, and 805 may include a set of magnets.magnets - In some embodiments, the
802, 803, 804, and 805 are configured so that for a given surface of themagnets magnetic strap 801, opposite magnetic poles of each magnet on the surface of themagnetic strap 801 are perpendicular to the surface of themagnetic strap 601. For example, the north pole of themagnet 802 is configured to be perpendicular to a top surface of themagnetic strap 801, whereas the south pole of themagnet 803 is configured to be perpendicular to the top surface of themagnetic strap 801. Similarly, the south pole of themagnet 804 is configured to be perpendicular to the bottom surface of themagnetic strap 801, whereas the north pole of themagnet 805 is configured to be perpendicular to the bottom surface of themagnetic strap 801. Note that the directions of the poles of the magnets may be reversed. - In some embodiments, the
802 and 804 are a single magnet and themagnets 803 and 805 are a single magnet.magnets - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 801 includes asegment 808 that is located between the 802 and 804 and themagnets 803 and 805. In some embodiments, themagnets segment 808 also includes the portion of themagnetic strap 801 that includes the magnets 802-805. In some embodiments, thesegment 808 is composed of a material that is substantially memoryless, as discussed above with respect to thesegment 606 inFIGS. 6A-6C . - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 801 includes asegment 809. In some embodiments, thesegment 809 includes the portion of themagnetic strap 801 that includes the 803 and 805. In some embodiments, themagnets segment 809 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to thesegment 607 inFIGS. 6A-6C . In some embodiments, thesegment 809 is composed of an elastic polymer. - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 801 includes asegment 811. In some embodiments, thesegment 811 includes the portion of themagnetic strap 801 that includes the 802 and 804. In some embodiments, themagnets segment 811 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to thesegment 608 inFIGS. 6A-6C . In some embodiments, thesegment 811 is composed of an elastic polymer. - In some embodiments, the cross section of the
802, 803, 804, and 805 are step-shaped (i.e., step-layered). These embodiments are illustrated inmagnets FIG. 8D . In these embodiments, the base of the magnet has protrusions (e.g., 821, 822, 823, 824) that form a step. The protrusions of theprotrusions 802, 803, 804, and 805 may be inserted into corresponding holes (or pockets) in the material so that themagnets 802, 803, 804, and 805 are secured to themagnets magnetic strap 801. Note that as discussed above, the material of themagnetic strap 801 may cover all but one surface of the magnets 802-805. Alternatively, the material of themagnetic strap 801 may cover all of the surfaces of the magnets 802-805. - In some embodiments, the
802 and 804, and 803 and 805, respectively, include posts that are configured to be inserted into each other through themagnets magnetic strap 801. These embodiments are illustrated inFIG. 8E . In these embodiments, themagnetic strap 801 has a hole at the 806 and 807 into which the posts of thelocations 802 and 804, and 803 and 805 (e.g., post 831 for themagnets magnet 803 and post 832 for the magnet 805) for respectively, are inserted. The posts of the 802 and 804, and 803 and 805, respectively, may be configured to be locked to each other after being attached to themagnets magnetic strap 801. - In some embodiments, the
segment 809 includes a cord-attachment mechanism that is used to attach themagnetic strap 801 to a cord (and/or a connector for the cord), as described above with respect toFIGS. 6A-6C . -
FIGS. 9A , 9B, and 9C illustrate top, perspective, and side views of a magnetic strap 901, according to some embodiments. The magnetic strap 901 is similar to themagnetic strap 601, so only the differences are discussed. The magnetic strap 901 includes amagnet 902 at alocation 904 on the magnetic strap 901 and amagnet 903 at alocation 905 on the magnetic strap 901. In some embodiments, the 902 and 903 are either embedded or partially embedded in the magnetic strap 901. In these embodiments, the material of the magnetic strap 901 that encloses themagnets 902 and 903 conforms (i.e., fitted) to the shape of themagnets 902 and 903. Note that although the discussion of the magnetic strap 901 refers to themagnets 902 and 903, each of themagnets 902 and 903 may include a set of magnets.magnets - In some embodiments, the
902 and 903 are configured so that opposite magnetic poles of each magnet are perpendicular to the top (or bottom) surface of the magnetic strap 901. For example, the north pole of themagnets magnet 902 is configured to be perpendicular to a first surface of the magnetic strap 901 whereas the south pole of themagnet 903 is configured to be perpendicular to the first surface of the magnetic strap 901. - In some embodiments, the magnetic strap 901 includes a
segment 906 that is located between themagnet 902 and themagnet 903. In some embodiments, thesegment 906 also includes the portion of the magnetic strap 901 that includes the 902 and 903. In some embodiments, themagnets segment 906 is composed of a material that is substantially memoryless, as discussed above with respect tosegment 606 inFIGS. 6A-6C . - In some embodiments, the magnetic strap 901 includes a
segment 907. In some embodiments, thesegment 907 includes the portion of the magnetic strap 901 that includes themagnet 903. In some embodiments, thesegment 907 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to thesegment 607 inFIGS. 6A-6C . In some embodiments, thesegment 907 is composed of an elastic polymer. - In some embodiments, the magnetic strap 901 includes a
segment 908. In some embodiments, thesegment 908 includes the portion of the magnetic strap 901 that includes themagnet 902. In some embodiments, thesegment 908 is composed of an elastic material, as discussed above with respect to thesegment 608 inFIGS. 6A-6C . In some embodiments, thesegment 908 is composed of an elastic polymer. - In some embodiments, the
segment 907 includes a cord-attachment mechanism that is used to attach the magnetic strap 901 to a cord (and/or a connector for the cord), as described above with respect to the cord-attachment mechanism 609 inFIGS. 6A-6C . - As discussed above, the
601, 701, 801, and 901 use magnets and/or a combination of magnets and magnetic material to form a loop that is configured to secure a cord. However, other attachment mechanisms may be used to form the loop. In some embodiments, the attachment mechanism is selected from the group consisting of adhesive, Velcro, snaps, buttons, buckles, beads, and van der Waals force attachment mechanisms, suction devices (e.g., suction cups), springs, bistable springs (e.g., a slap bracelet), sleeves that insert into slots, pegs that are inserted into holes, and hinges.magnetic straps -
FIGS. 12A-12F illustrate magnetic straps 1201-1206, respectively, which are alternative designs of the magnetic strap 601 (701, 801, or 901), according to some embodiments. The magnetic straps 1201-1206 illustrated in these figures differ only in the shapes of the ends of the straps. These alternative designs may also be applied to the 601, 701, 801, and 901 illustrated inmagnetic straps FIGS. 6-9 , respectively. - In some embodiments, the thickness of the material of the magnetic strap 601 (701, 801, or 901) from the edge magnets gradually decreases to the thickness of the
magnetic strap 601 at the center of the 606, 706, 808, or 906. In some embodiments, the thickness of the material of thesections magnetic strap 601 from the edge magnets gradually decreases to the thickness of the magnetic strap 601 a predetermined location in the 606, 706, 808, or 906. In these embodiments, the thickness of thesections magnetic strap 601 from the predetermined location in the 606, 706, 808, or 906 to the center of thesections 606, 706, 808, or 906 is constant. By adjusting the predetermined location, the flexibility of thesections magnetic strap 601 may be increased or decreased. For example, if the predetermined location is closer to the magnets, themagnetic strap 601 is more flexible because themagnetic strap 601 is thinner in the 606, 706, 808, or 906. However, if the predetermined location is at the center of thesections 606, 706, 808, or 906, thesections magnetic strap 601 is less flexible because themagnetic strap 601 is thicker in the 606, 706, 808, or 906.sections - In some embodiments, the material enclosing the magnets of the magnetic strap 601 (801, or 901) forms a substantially flat surface over the top and the bottom of the magnets. In these embodiments, the substantially flat surface increases the surface area on which the magnets can be magnetically coupled to each other, and in turn, increases the magnetic coupling force between the magnets as compared to a crowned surface (e.g., as illustrated in
FIG. 7C ). - Note that although the embodiments described herein encapsulate the magnets in the material of the magnetic strap 601 (701, 801, or 901), the magnets may also be attached (e.g., using an adhesive, bolts, rivets, or other attachment mechanisms) onto one or more faces of the magnetic strap 601 (e.g., the “top” side or the “bottom” side of the magnetic strap 601).
- In some embodiments, the
601, 701, 801, and 901 are symmetrical. In these embodiments, themagnetic straps 601, 701, 801, and 901 may be folded over on either surface to form the loop. In some embodiments, themagnetic straps 601, 701, 801, and 901 are asymmetrical. In these embodiments, themagnetic straps 601, 701, 801, and 901 may only be folded on one of the surfaces to form the loop. In some embodiments, one surface of themagnetic straps 601, 701, 801, and 901 have a high-friction coating to help hold the wrapped cord in the strap and one surface of themagnetic straps 601, 701, 801, and 901 have a low-friction coating to ease removal of the strap from an object.magnetic straps - Note that any combination of the features of the magnetic straps described above with respect to
FIGS. 6-9 may be used in a particular implementation of a magnetic strap. - As described above, the cord-
609, 709, 810, and 909 allow theattachment mechanisms 601, 701, 801, and 901, respectively, to be attached to a cord (and/or a connector for the cord). Although the following discussion of cord-attachment mechanisms refers to the cord-magnetic straps attachment mechanism 609, the embodiments described below may be applied to the cord- 709, 810, and 909.attachment mechanisms FIGS. 10 and 11 illustrate exemplary embodiments of the cord-attachment mechanism 609. -
FIG. 10A illustrates the cord-attachment mechanism 609 as having a plurality ofslits 1001, according to some embodiments.FIG. 10B illustrates the cord-attachment mechanism 609 as having asingle slit 1002, according to some embodiments.FIG. 10C illustrates the cord-attachment mechanism 609 as having twoslits 1003 configured as an “X” or a “+,” according to some embodiments. Note that the angle between the twoslits 1003 may be arbitrarily set.FIG. 10E illustrates the cord-attachment mechanism 609 as havingslits 1005 in the shape of a star, according to some embodiments. The dimensions of the 1001, 1002, 1003, and 1005 are selected so that when a cord is inserted into theslits 1001, 1002, 1003, and 1005, the material around the respective slits applies a pressure against the cord and hold the cord to theslits magnetic strap 601. Furthermore, the dimensions of the 1001, 1002, 1003, and 1005 are selected so that the cord-slits attachment mechanism 609 can attach to cords (or connectors of cords) of varying sizes. After themagnetic strap 601 has been attached to the cord (or a connector of the cord), a predetermined elastic force exerted by the hole against the cord secures themagnetic strap 601 to the cord (or the connector of the cord). -
FIG. 10D illustrates the cord-attachment mechanism 609 as a hole 1004 (e.g., a circular hole) in thesegment 607, according to some embodiments. In these embodiments, a cord (or a connector of the cord) may be inserted into the hole. For embodiments in which thesegment 607 is elastic, the hole expands as the cord (or the connector for the cord) is inserted into the hole. In some embodiments, the cord-attachment mechanism 609 is formed from an elastic polymer (e.g., by injecting an elastic polymer into a mold for themagnetic strap 601 or by cutting material from thesegment 607, etc.). For example, the elastic polymer may be the elastic polymers described above with respect to thesegment 607. In some embodiments, the cord-attachment mechanism 609 is composed of the same polymer as the 606, 607, and 608. In some embodiments, the cord-attachment mechanism is composed of different, but compatible, polymers. Note that the diameter of thesegments hole 1004 may be determined based on factors including the range of diameters for cords and/or connectors for the cords to be used with themagnetic strap 601. -
FIGS. 11A and 11B illustrate a side view and a perspective view, respectively, of agrommet 1101 for the cord-attachment mechanism 609, according to some embodiments. Thegrommet 1101 increases the surface area in contact with a cord (or a connector for the cord) to reduce the tendency of the cord-attachment mechanism 609 to move up and/or down a cord (or a connector for the cord) and to prevent the material insection 607 from forming a cone shape when installing and/or using themagnetic strap 601. In some embodiments, the grommet has a height of 0.158 inches. In some embodiments, the grommet has a diameter of 0.1 inches. -
FIG. 11C illustrates anothergrommet 1102 for the cord-attachment mechanism 609, according to some embodiments. Thegrommet 1102 includes a centrally-located hole and slits coming out of the hole. The slits allow thegrommet 1102 to expand to fit larger diameter cords (or connectors). - Note that other cord-attachment mechanisms may be used instead of the hole. For example, Velcro, adhesives, magnetic beads, suction devices, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms, buttons, buckles, springs, bistable springs (e.g., a slap bracelet), sleeves that insert into slots, pegs that are inserted into holes, hinges a molded strap with snaps may be used.
-
FIGS. 13A and 13B illustrate top and side views, respectively, of amagnetic bead 1301, according to some embodiments. Themagnetic bead 1301 includes aleg 1302 and aleg 1303 that are pivotally coupled to each other at one end of each respective leg. Each of the 1302 and 1303 also includes a free end. As illustrated inlegs FIGS. 13A and 13B , theleg 1302 and theleg 1303 are formed from a single piece of material (e.g., a flexible material that allows the 1302 and 1303 to bend toward each other). However, thelegs 1302 and 1303 may be pivotally coupled to each other using other mechanisms. For example, a hinge may be used to couple thelegs leg 1302 to theleg 1303. Themagnetic bead 1301 also includes amagnet 1304 attached to the free end of theleg 1302 and amagnet 1305 attached to the free end of theleg 1303. Note that a magnetic material may be substituted for one of the 1304 and 1305. In some embodiments, themagnets 1304 and 1305 are embedded into the free ends of themagnets 1302 and 1303, respectively. In some embodiments, the free ends of thelegs 1302 and 1303 cover all of the surfaces of thelegs 1304 and 1305. In some embodiments, the free ends of themagnets 1302 and 1303 cover all but one surface of thelegs 1304 and 1305, respectively, as illustrated inmagnets FIGS. 13A and 13B . In some embodiments, the magnets are selected form the group consisting of magnetic metallic elements, composite magnets, ceramic or ferrite magnets, alnico magnets, ticonal magnets, injection molded magnets, flexible magnets, rare earth magnets, and electromagnets. In some embodiments, the magnets are Neodymium magnets. In some embodiments, each magnet is a Neodymium having a grade of N42 a length of 0.27 inches, a width of 0.125 inches, and a thickness of 0.47 inches. Note that the grade and the dimensions of the Neodymium magnet depend on the size of the free ends of the 1302 and 1303 magnetic beads. For example, a lower grade Neodymium magnet having larger dimensions may be used for a clip that has larger legs.legs - In some embodiments, the
magnetic bead 1301 includes two configurations. In a first configuration, themagnetic bead 1301 is open so that the free ends of the 1302 and 1303 are not touching each other. In a second configuration, thelegs magnetic bead 1301 is closed so that the free ends of the 1302 and 1303 are touching each other. When thelegs magnetic bead 1301 is closed, the 1304 and 1305 are magnetically attached to each other and hold themagnets magnetic bead 1301 in the closed configuration. To change themagnetic bead 1301 from the open configuration to the closed configuration, the free ends of the 1302 and 1303 are bent towards each other. To return thelegs magnetic bead 1301 to the open configuration a force greater than the attractive magnetic force must be applied to magnetically detach the free ends of the 1302 and 1303. The free ends of thelegs 1302 and 1303 must also be moved to a position so that the magnetic force between thelegs 1304 and 1305 does not pull the free ends of themagnets 1302 and 1303 together again.legs - In some embodiments, the free ends of the
1302 and 1303 each have at least one substantially flat surface. In these embodiments, when free ends of thelegs 1302 and 1303 are bent toward each other so that they touch, the substantially flat surfaces of thelegs 1302 and 1303 are flush (i.e., there are no gaps) with each other (e.g., seelegs FIGS. 14A to 14K ). - In some embodiments, the
magnetic bead 1301 includes acavity 1306. When attaching themagnetic bead 1301 to a cord, the cord is inserted into thecavity 1306 and themagnetic bead 1301 is closed. Once closed, themagnetic bead 1301 holds the cord until themagnetic bead 1301 is opened. Thecavity 1306 allows themagnetic bead 1301 to attach to the cord so that the surfaces of the free ends of the 1302 and 1303 are flush with each other (e.g., seelegs FIGS. 6A to 6J ). In some embodiments, thecavity 1306 is lined with a high-friction material to make thecavity 1306 more difficult to adjust when themagnetic bead 1301 is attached to a cord. In some embodiments, thecavity 1306 is lined with a low-friction material to make thecavity 1306 easier to adjust when themagnetic bead 1301 is attached to a cord. - In some embodiments, the
cavity 1306 is formed of an elastic material that stretches to accommodate cords of varying sizes. The elastic material of thecavity 1306 allows themagnetic bead 1301 to attach to cords of varying sizes so that faces of the free ends of the 1302 and 1303 are flush with each other (e.g., seelegs FIGS. 6A to 6J ). The elastic material also provides a force against the cord so that themagnetic bead 1301 does not slip along the cord. In some embodiments, thecavity 1306 is ribbed. - Instead of using the
1304 and 1305 to attach themagnets magnetic bead 1301 to the cord, other attachment mechanisms may be used. In some embodiments, the attachment mechanism are selected form the group consisting of a snap closure, Velcro, an adhesive, a mechanical bead (e.g., a groove in the side themagnetic bead 1301 that snaps onto the cord), a latch, metal that bends and holds its shape, and the like. -
FIGS. 13C and 13D illustrate cross-section views of themagnetic bead 1301, according to some embodiments. As illustrated inFIG. 13D , themagnet 1305 is shaped like a step. Specifically, themagnet 1305 includes 1310 and 1311 that are configured to hold theprotrusions magnet 1305 in the material of themagnetic bead 1301. In some embodiments, the 1310 and 1311 are located on two opposing sides of theprotrusions magnet 1305. The 1310 and 1311 may run the full length or a portion of the length of the side of theprotrusions magnet 1305. In some embodiments, two or more protrusions may be used. For example, themagnet 1305 may include protrusions on all of the sides of themagnet 1305. Note that themagnet 1304 may also have the 1310 and 1311.protrusions -
FIGS. 14A to 14 k illustrate varying dimensions for magnetic beads, according to some embodiments. Each of the magnetic beads is attached to a cord forearbuds 601. Each of the 602, 604, 606, 608, 610, 612, 614, 616, 618, and 620 includes amagnetic beads 603, 605, 607, 609, 611, 613, 615, 617, 619, 621, respectively. Table 1 presents exemplary dimensions for each of the magnetic beads illustrated incavity FIGS. 14A to 14K . In Table 1, “length” refers to the dimension of the magnetic bead (or magnet) along the cord, “width” refers to the dimension of the magnetic bead (or magnet) that is perpendicular to the cord, and “thickness” refers to the thickness of the magnetic bead (or magnet). All dimensions are listed in inches. -
TABLE 1 Exemplary dimensions for magnetic beads illustrated in FIGS. 14A-14K. FIG. 14A 14B 14C 14D 14E 14F 14G 14H 14J 14K Folded Length 0.31 0.42 0.56 0.25 0.31 0.42 0.56 0.25 0.31 0.26 Bead (along Size cord) Width 0.25 0.22 0.20 0.25 0.27 0.24 0.22 0.28 0.25 0.22 (⊥ to cord) Thickness 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.18 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.18 0.19 0.25 Magnet Length 0.213 0.36 0.13 0.19 0.213 0.36 0.13 0.19 0.213 0.197 Size (along cord) Width 0.125 0.1 0.08 0.125 0.125 0.1 0.08 0.125 0.125 0.099 (⊥ to cord) Thickness 0.047 0.047 0.047 0.063 0.047 0.047 0.047 0.063 0.125 0.099 - In some embodiments, when the magnetic beads described herein are attached to a cord, the magnetic beads can rotate about the cord so that the polarities of the magnets in the magnetic beads can be aligned so that two distinct magnetic beads can magnetically attach to each other.
- In some embodiments, a magnetic sheath is used in lieu of or in addition to magnetic beads. The magnetic sheath is described in more detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/338,680, entitled “Magnetic Cord Management System,” filed Dec. 18, 2008.
-
FIGS. 15A to 15H illustrate the process of configuring a cord management system. These figures illustrate acord 1515, which is an audio cord. Note that 1513 and 1514 are segments of the cord 1515 (e.g., seecords FIG. 15D ), and are also audio cords. -
FIG. 15A illustrates a process of attaching amagnetic bead 1520 to thecord 1513, according to some embodiments. As illustrated inFIG. 15A , thecord 1513 is inserted into a cavity (e.g., thecavity 1306 inFIG. 13A ) of themagnetic bead 1520. In this case, thecord 1513 is connected to aspeaker 1511 of the headphone. Similarly, thecord 1514 is connected to aspeaker 1512 of the headphone. In some embodiments, themagnetic bead 1520 is attached to the cord 1513 a predetermined distance from thespeaker 1511. - Once the
magnetic bead 1520 is closed, themagnetic bead 1520 is attached to the cord 1513 (e.g., seeFIG. 15B ). In some embodiments, another magnetic bead is attached to the cord 1514 a predetermined distance from thespeaker 1512, as illustrated inFIG. 15D . In some embodiments, only one of the two magnetic beads attached to the 1511 and 1512 includes a magnet. In these embodiments, the other magnetic bead includes a magnetic material.speakers - In some embodiments, a magnetic bead is opened by sliding the magnets of the magnetic bead across each other until the magnets of the magnetic bead are magnetically detached from each other. In some embodiments, a magnetic bead is opened by prying the magnets of the magnetic bead away from each other until the magnets of the magnetic bead are magnetically detached from each other.
- In some embodiments, a
magnetic bead 1513 is attached to the cord 1515 a predetermined distance from a connector 1516 (e.g., an audio connector). These embodiments are illustrated inFIG. 15C . In some embodiments, the predetermined distance is selected so that when theconnector 1516 is inserted into the cord-attachment mechanism 1509 of themagnetic strap 1501, themagnetic bead 1523 is configured to be magnetically attached to at least one of the 1502 and 1503 of themagnets magnetic strap 1501 when thecord 1515 is wrapped around themagnetic strap 1501. Themagnetic bead 1523 holds thecord 1515 on themagnetic strap 1501 to facilitate winding of the cord around themagnetic strap 1501. Thus, a user does not need to hold thecord 1515 to themagnetic strap 1501 while winding thecord 1515 around themagnetic strap 1501. - In some embodiments, a
magnetic bead 1522 is attached to thecord 1513. These embodiments are illustrated inFIG. 15D . In some embodiments, themagnetic bead 1522 is attached to the cord 1513 a specified distance from thespeaker 1511. In some embodiments, the specified distance is selected so that themagnetic bead 1522 can be magnetically attached to one of the magnets of themagnetic strap 1501 when thecord 1513 is wrapped around themagnetic strap 1501. In some embodiments, the specified distance is selected so that themagnetic bead 1522 can be magnetically attached to one or more of the 1520 and 1521 when themagnetic beads cord 1513 is wrapped once around an object (e.g., a mobile electronic device). For example, a user may wrap thecord 1513 once around the object and attach themagnetic bead 1522 on thecord 1513 at the location where themagnetic beads 1520 and/or 1521 intersect (or overlap) thecord 1513. - In some embodiments, the
connector 1516 is inserted into the cord-attachment mechanism 1509 of themagnetic strap 1501. These embodiments are illustrated inFIGS. 15E and 15F . By inserting theconnector 1516 into the cord-attachment mechanism 1509, thecord 1515 is secured to themagnetic strap 1501. - In some embodiments, a magnetic material 1524 (e.g., the magnetic material 103) is attached to an
object 1530, as illustrated inFIG. 15G . Note that themagnetic material 1524 may be a magnet or magnetic material as discussed above. In these embodiments, themagnetic material 1524 is attached to theobject 1530 at a predetermined location. In some embodiments, the predetermined location is selected so that when themagnetic strap 1501 is attached to theobject 1530, themagnet 1502 is magnetically attached to themagnetic material 1524. These embodiments assist with the deployment of themagnetic strap 1501 and/or may be used to hold themagnetic strap 1501 to theobject 1530 when themagnetic strap 1501 is in its natural configuration (e.g., the flat configuration). Note that these embodiments are also useful for electronic devices that have connectors at the bottom of the device. For these electronic devices, themagnetic strap 1501 is attached so that the cord-attachment mechanism 1509 faces downwards when the electronic device is held in an upright position (e.g., when the user is interacting with the user interface of the electronic device). Thus, when themagnetic strap 1501 is in its natural configuration (e.g., the flat configuration) and themagnetic material 1524 is not used, gravity may pull down the end of themagnetic strap 1501 that includes themagnet 1502. However, when themagnetic strap 1501 is in its natural configuration and themagnet 1502 is magnetically attached to themagnetic material 1524, the end of themagnetic strap 1501 that includes themagnet 1502 will not be pulled down by gravity. In some embodiments, the predetermined location is selected so that when themagnetic strap 1501 is attached to theobject 1530, themagnet 1503 is magnetically attached to themagnetic material 1524. These embodiments may be used to hold themagnetic strap 1501 to theobject 1530 when themagnetic strap 1501 is folded over into the loop configuration. - In some embodiments, the
magnetic material 1524 is selected from the group consisting of a ferromagnetic material and a paramagnetic material. In some embodiments, themagnetic material 1524 is low-carbon steel. In some embodiments, themagnetic material 1524 is Vanadium carbonyl. Themagnetic material 1524 may be any shape, including, but not limited to, a disc, a square, a rectangle, a decorative shape, and the like. The size and shape of the magnetic material may be selected based on factors including, but not limited to, an aesthetic design of the object onto which the magnetic material is being attached and a width of the magnetic strap. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is a square having 0.5 inches sides. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is a circle having a radius of 0.5 inches. In some embodiments, the thickness of the magnetic material is 0.006 inches. Note that themagnetic material 1524 is beneficial when using themagnetic strap 1501 with an electronic device that has an audio connector port on the side or the bottom of the electronic device. In these cases, themagnetic material 1524 may be used to hold themagnetic strap 1501 to the object. Specifically, themagnetic material 1524 may be used as a magnetic attachment point for themagnet 1502 so that themagnetic strap 1502 does not dangle on the electronic device. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is galvanized or otherwise coated with a sealant. The sealant may protect against rusting and protects the end users against the sharp edges of the magnetic material. -
FIG. 15J illustrates a top view and a side view of themagnetic material 1524, according to some embodiments. As illustrated, themagnetic material 1524 includes several elements. In some embodiments, themagnetic material 1524 includes a disc-shaped magnetic material 1552 (e.g., composed of the magnetic material as described herein) whose outer edge is at least partially covered and/or surrounded by a ring-shaped elastic material 1551 (e.g., an elastic polymer as described herein). The ring-shapedelastic material 1551 and/or disc-shapedmagnetic material 1552 may be coated with an adhesive (or other attachment mechanism) on one surface to allow themagnetic material 1524 to be attached to theobject 1530. The ring-shapedelastic material 1551 is configured to conform to the shape of the object when pressed against the object. Alternatively, or additionally, the disc-shapedmaterial 1552 and/or themagnetic material 1524 may be attached to an intermediate material (e.g., using adhesives and the like) that includes adhesives on one or both surfaces so that the intermediate material may be attached to theobject 1530 and to the disc-shapedmaterial 1552 and themagnetic material 1524. The intermediate material may be chosen so that when the intermediate material is pressed onto the object, the intermediate material conforms to the shape of the object. For example, the intermediate material may be foam. Note that the shape of themagnetic material 1524 may be any other shape (e.g., a square, a rectangle, etc.). The elastic material that partially covers and/or surrounds the magnetic material may have a corresponding shape or may be any shape. For example, if themagnetic material 1524 has a disc shape, the elastic material may be a disc shape or may be a square shape (or any other shape). - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 1501 is attached to the object 1530 (e.g., seeFIG. 15H ). Theobject 1530 may be a portable electronic device (e.g., a mobile phone, a music player, etc.) or any other object (e.g., a hand). In some embodiments, themagnetic material 1524 is attached to theobject 1530 and themagnet 1502 of themagnetic strap 1501 is magnetically attached to themagnetic material 1501 so that themagnetic strap 1501 is attached to theobject 1530. In some embodiments, theconnector 1516 is connected to a port on theobject 1520. In these embodiments, themagnetic strap 1501 lays flat on the surface of theobject 1530. Note that themagnetic strap 1501 may also be incorporated into a case or into theobject 1530, as described herein. - In some embodiments, the
magnetic strap 1501 does not have a predefined “top” side and a predefined “bottom” side. In other words, either face of themagnetic strap 1501 may be used as the top (or “face up”) side on theobject 1530. In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 1501 has a predefined “top” side and a predefined “bottom” side. In these embodiments, themagnetic strap 101 can only be used with the top side facing away from theobject 1530. -
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of amethod 2200 for using a cord management system, according to some embodiments. As described above, a strap of the cord management system may be used by itself or may be used in conjunction with magnetic beads and/or a magnetic material attached to the object. - As noted above, the
magnetic strap 101 may be used with or without theelectronic device 210. In either case, steps 2202-2208 are performed. A cord is wrapped (2202) around themagnetic strap 101 substantially perpendicular to and/or otherwise across themagnetic strap 101 at any angle, wherein the strap includes a first set of magnets attached to a first location on themagnetic strap 101 and a second set of magnets attached to a second location on themagnetic strap 101. Themagnetic strap 101 is folded (2204) so that themagnetic strap 101 forms a loop around the cord. The loop is secured (2206) by coupling the first set of magnets and the second set of magnets. - In some embodiments, when the user desires to use the cord, the cord is deployed (2208) from the
magnetic strap 101 by pulling the cord away form the strap (e.g., substantially parallel to the length of the strap or in any other direction from the strap). When the cord is pulled away from themagnetic strap 101, the first set of magnets is decoupled from the second set of magnets so that themagnetic strap 101 no longer forms the loop around the cord. In embodiments where themagnetic strap 101 is used by itself to manage the cord, the cord may be deployed from themagnetic strap 101 by pulling the cord away from themagnetic strap 101 in a direction other than substantially parallel to the length of themagnetic strap 101. -
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of amethod 2300 for configuring a cord management system, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, at least one magnetic material or magnet is attached (2302) to an object. For example, themagnetic material 103 may be attached to theelectronic device 210. - In some embodiments, a plurality of magnetic beads and/or magnetic material is attached (2304) to a cord. In some embodiments, at least one magnetic bead of the plurality of magnetic beads is attached to the cord so that when the cord is wrapped around the strap, the at least one magnetic bead is magnetically attached to one set of magnets and/or magnetic material of the magnetic strap. In some embodiments, the cord is an audio cord of a headphone, which includes an audio connector and one or more speakers connected to the audio connector via the audio cord. In some embodiments, a first magnetic bead of the plurality of magnetic beads is attached (2320) to the audio cord at a predetermined distance from the audio connector of the headphone. In some embodiments, a second magnetic bead of the plurality of magnetic beads is attached (2322) to the audio cord at a predetermined distance from a first speaker in the one or more speakers of the headphone. In some embodiments, a third magnetic bead of the plurality of magnetic beads is attached (2324) to the audio cord at a predetermined distance from a second speaker in the one or more speakers of the headphone.
- In some embodiments, the cord (and/or a connector for the cord) is attached (2306) to a cord-attachment mechanism. For example, the
connector 204 of thecord 201 may be inserted into the cord-attachment mechanism of themagnetic strap 101. - In some embodiments, a first set of magnets or magnetic material of the
magnetic strap 101 is attached (2308) to the magnetic material or the magnet (e.g., the magnetic material 103) attached to the object. As discussed above, instead of using a magnet attached to the object, a material onto which themagnetic strap 101 can attach to the object is used (e.g., an adhesive disc, a suction cup, etc.). -
FIGS. 16-19 illustrate other embodiments of the cord management system. -
FIG. 16A illustrates amagnetic strap 1601 and acord 1602, according to some embodiments. Themagnetic strap 1601 can be any of the magnetic straps discussed above (e.g., the 101, 601, 701, 801, or 901). As illustrated inmagnetic straps FIG. 16A , themagnetic strap 1601 includes 1605 and 1606 and themagnets cord 1602 includes 1603 and 1604. In contrast to the embodiments described above, the cord-attachment mechanism of thespeakers magnetic strap 1601 is not used to attach themagnetic strap 1601 to thecord 1602. In order to use themagnetic strap 1601 with the object, themagnetic strap 1601 is attached to the object. In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 1601 is magnetically attached to the object. In these embodiments, magnetic material (e.g., the magnetic material 103) is attached to the object (e.g., using adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, etc., as described above) so that at least one of 1605 and 1606 can be magnetically attached to the magnetic material. When themagnets magnets 1605 and/or 1606 are magnetically attached to the magnetic material, the magnetic strap is coupled to the object. In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 1601 is attached to the object using one selected from the group consisting of adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, and a van der Waals force attachment mechanism. - As described above and as illustrated in
FIGS. 16A and 16B , thecord 1602 can be wrapped around the object and themagnetic strap 1601 and secured by folding themagnetic strap 1601 into the loop, as described above. -
FIG. 26A illustrates anobject 2601 and thecord 201 secured by themagnetic strap 101, according to some embodiments. As illustrated inFIG. 26A , thecord 201 and themagnetic strap 101 are detached from theobject 2601. Amagnetic material 2602 is also attached to theobject 2601. As discussed above, themagnetic material 2602 may be located on theobject 2601 so that when themagnetic strap 101 is attached to theobject 2601, one of the 104 and 105 can be magnetically attached to themagnets magnetic material 2602. In some cases, the end user may reattach themagnetic strap 101 and/or thecord 201 to theobject 2601 without deploying thecord 201 from themagnetic strap 101, as illustrated inFIG. 26B . In some cases, a user may have already wrapped thecord 201 in themagnetic strap 101 where themagnetic strap 101 is detached from theobject 2601. In these cases, the user may reattach the magnetic strap to theobject 2601 to hold themagnetic strap 101 and thecord 201 to theobject 2601.FIG. 26C illustrates themagnetic strap 101 attached to theobject 2601, according to some embodiments. As illustrated inFIG. 26C , the connector for thecord 201 is not attached to the cord-attachment mechanism of themagnetic strap 101. Themagnetic strap 101 may be attached to the surface of theobject 2601 using any of the attachment mechanisms discussed herein (e.g., magnets, suction cups, adhesives, etc.). For example, themagnetic material 103 may be attached to the object. Themagnets 104 and/or 105 may then be magnetically attached to themagnetic material 103 so that themagnetic strap 101 is attached to theobject 2601, as illustrated inFIG. 26C . Note that although the connector for thecord 201 is illustrated as being attached to a corresponding connector of theobject 2601, the connector of thecord 201 may also be disconnected from the corresponding connector. In other words, the connector of thecord 201 may dangle freely from themagnetic strap 2602. -
FIG. 27A illustrates amagnetic strap 2701 attached to anobject 2700, according to some embodiments. Note thatFIG. 27A is similar toFIG. 16A with the exception that theobject 2700 has larger dimensions that the illustrated inFIG. 16A . Themagnetic strap 2701 can be any of the magnetic straps discussed above (e.g., the 101, 601, 701, 801, or 901). As illustrated inmagnetic straps FIG. 27A , themagnetic strap 2701 includes 2705 and 2706 and themagnets cord 2702 includes 2703 and 2704. As withspeakers FIG. 16A , the cord-attachment mechanism of themagnetic strap 2701 is not used to attach themagnetic strap 2701 to thecord 2702. In order to use themagnetic strap 2701 with the object, themagnetic strap 2701 is attached to the object. In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 2701 is magnetically attached to the object. In these embodiments, magnetic material (e.g., the magnetic material 103) is attached to the object (e.g., using adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, etc., as described above) so that at least one of 2705 and 2706 can be magnetically attached to the magnetic material. When themagnets magnets 2705 and/or 2706 are magnetically attached to the magnetic material, the magnetic strap is coupled to the object. In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 2701 is attached to the object using one selected from the group consisting of adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, and a van der Waals force attachment mechanism. - As described above and as illustrated in
FIGS. 27A and 27B , thecord 2702 can be wrapped around theobject 2700 and themagnetic strap 2701 and secured by folding themagnetic strap 2701 into the loop, as described above. Note that since theobject 2700 is larger than the object illustrated inFIG. 16A , the number of loops of thecord 2702 around theobject 2700 is less than the number of loops of thecord 1602 around the object illustrated inFIG. 16A . -
FIGS. 27C and 27D are analogous toFIGS. 27A and 27B except that themagnetic strap 2701 inFIGS. 27C and 27D is rotated 90 degrees on theobject 2700 and thecord 2702 is wrapped vertically around theobject 2700. -
FIGS. 27E and 27F are analogous toFIGS. 27A and 27B except that themagnetic strap 2701 inFIGS. 27E and 27F is attached to the top surface of theobject 2700 and thecord 2702 is wrapped vertically around theobject 2700. As illustrated inFIGS. 27E and 27F , the connector for thecord 2702 is attached through the cord-attachment mechanism of themagnetic strap 2701 to the corresponding connector on theobject 2700. -
FIG. 27G is analogous toFIG. 26C and illustrates themagnetic strap 2701 securing thecord 2702 and attached to theobject 2700, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 17A illustrates amagnetic strap 1701 attached to an object, according to some embodiments. Themagnetic strap 1701 can be any of the magnetic straps discussed above (e.g., the 101, 601, 701, 801, or 901). As illustrated inmagnetic straps FIG. 17A , themagnetic strap 1701 includes 1705 and 1706 and themagnets cord 1702 includes 1703 and 1704. In contrast to the embodiments described above, the cord-attachment mechanism of thespeakers magnetic strap 1701 is not present. In order to use themagnetic strap 1701 with the object, themagnetic strap 1701 is attached to the object. In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 1701 is magnetically attached to the object. In these embodiments, magnetic material (e.g., the magnetic material 103) is attached to the object (e.g., using adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, etc., as described above) so that at least one of 1705 and 1706 can be magnetically attached to the magnetic material. When themagnets magnets 1705 and/or 1706 are magnetically attached to the magnetic material, the magnetic strap is coupled to the object. In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 1701 is attached to the object using one selected from the group consisting of adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, and a van der Waals force attachment mechanism. - In some embodiments, at least one surface of the
magnetic strap 1701 is a high-friction surface. In these embodiments, the high-friction surface faces the object and helps keep themagnetic strap 1701 from moving on the object. - As described above and as illustrated in
FIGS. 17A and 17B , thecord 1702 can be wrapped around the object and themagnetic strap 1701 and secured by folding themagnetic strap 1701 into the loop, as described above. -
FIG. 28A illustrates a magnetic strap attached to an object, according to some embodiments. Note thatFIG. 28A is similar toFIG. 17A with the exception that theobject 2800 has larger dimensions that the illustrated inFIG. 17A . Themagnetic strap 2801 can be any of the magnetic straps discussed above (e.g., the 101, 601, 701, 801, or 901). As illustrated inmagnetic straps FIG. 28A , themagnetic strap 2801 includes 2805 and 2806 and themagnets cord 2802 includes 2803 and 2804. As withspeakers FIG. 17A , the cord-attachment mechanism of themagnetic strap 2801 is not present. In order to use themagnetic strap 2801 with the object, themagnetic strap 2801 is attached to the object. In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 2801 is magnetically attached to the object. In these embodiments, magnetic material (e.g., the magnetic material 103) is attached to the object (e.g., using adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, etc., as described above) so that at least one of 2805 and 2806 can be magnetically attached to the magnetic material. When themagnets magnets 2805 and/or 2806 are magnetically attached to the magnetic material, the magnetic strap is coupled to the object. In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 2801 is attached to the object using one selected from the group consisting of adhesives, suction cups, Velcro, and a van der Waals force attachment mechanism. - As described above and as illustrated in
FIGS. 28A and 28B , thecord 2802 can be wrapped around theobject 2800 and themagnetic strap 2801 and secured by folding themagnetic strap 2801 into the loop, as described above. Note that since theobject 2800 is larger than the object illustrated inFIG. 17A , the number of loops of thecord 2802 around theobject 2800 is less than the number of loops of thecord 1702 around the object illustrated inFIG. 17A . -
FIGS. 28C and 28D are analogous toFIGS. 28A and 28B except that themagnetic strap 2801 inFIGS. 28C and 28D is rotated 90 degrees on theobject 2800 and thecord 2802 is wrapped vertically around theobject 2800. -
FIGS. 28E and 28F are analogous toFIGS. 28A and 28B except that themagnetic strap 2801 inFIGS. 28E and 28F is attached to the top surface of theobject 2800 and thecord 2802 is wrapped vertically around theobject 2800. As illustrated inFIGS. 28E and 28F , the connector for thecord 2802 is attached through the cord-attachment mechanism of themagnetic strap 2801 to the corresponding connector on theobject 2800. -
FIG. 28G is analogous toFIG. 26C and illustrates themagnetic strap 2801 securing thecord 2802 and attached to theobject 2800, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 18A illustrates amagnetic strap 1801 integrated into a case 1812 for an object, according to some embodiments. Note that the term “case” refers to any type of material that covers or partially covers the object. For example, the case may include, but is not limited to flip case, a zipper case, a skin, an open-faced case, and the like. Themagnetic strap 1801 includes 1802 and 1803. Themagnets magnetic strap 1801 illustrated inFIG. 18A cannot be detached from the case 1812. However, the operation of themagnetic strap 1801 is similar to the operation of the magnetic straps described above. For example, themagnetic strap 1801 may be folded to form a loop, as illustrated inFIG. 18B . Note that themagnetic strap 1801 lies in a cavity of the case 1812. For example,FIG. 18B illustrates that the cavity is revealed when themagnetic strap 1801 is folded over to form the loop. In some embodiments, one of the 1802 and 1803 is a magnet and the other is a magnetic material. In some embodiments, themagnets magnetic strap 1801 is integrated into the object (e.g., the back of the object). -
FIG. 19A illustrates acase 1922 for an object, according to some embodiments. Thecase 1922 includes a cavity 1911. 1912 and 1913 are embedded into cavity 1911 of theMagnets case 1922. A magnetic strap 1911 including 1902 and 1903 may be magnetically attached to themagnets case 1922, according to some embodiments. For example, the 1902 and 1903 may be magnetically attached to themagnets 1912 and 1913, respectively. Note that magnetic materials (e.g., as described above) may be substituted for themagnets 1902, 1903, 1912, and 1913. Also note that only one of the pair ofmagnets 1902 and 1912 may be substituted for the magnetic material. Similarly, only one of the pair ofmagnets 1903 and 1913 may be substituted for the magnetic material. In other words, at least one magnet is required for each end of the magnetic strap. The operation of themagnets magnetic strap 1901 is similar to the operation of the magnetic straps described above. For example, themagnetic strap 1901 may be folded to form a loop, as illustrated inFIG. 19C . In contrast to themagnetic strap 1801, themagnetic strap 1901 may be removed from the case 1922 (e.g., seeFIG. 19A ). In some embodiments, themagnetic strap 1901 is integrated into the object (e.g., the back of the object). -
FIGS. 19D-19F illustrate how themagnetic strap 1901 is used to secure a cord.FIG. 19D illustrates a cord wrapped around themagnetic strap 1901 and thecase 1922,FIG. 19E illustrates themagnetic strap 1901 folded over to form a loop around the cord, andFIG. 19F illustrates themagnetic strap 1901 securing the cord and detached from thecase 1922, according to some embodiments. -
FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating acomputer system 2400 for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments. Thecomputer system 2400 typically includes one or more processing units (CPU's) 2402, one or more network orother communications interfaces 2404,memory 2410, and one ormore communication buses 2409 for interconnecting these components. Thecommunication buses 2409 may include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Thecomputer system 2400 optionally may include auser interface 2405 comprising adisplay device 2406 and input devices 2408 (e.g., keyboard, mouse, touch screen, keypads, etc.).Memory 2410 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM or other random access solid state memory devices; and may include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices.Memory 2410 may optionally include one or more storage devices remotely located from the CPU(s) 2402.Memory 2410, or alternately the non-volatile memory device(s) withinmemory 2410, comprises a computer readable storage medium. In some embodiments,memory 2410 stores the following programs, modules and data structures, or a subset thereof: -
- an
operating system 2412 that includes procedures for handling various basic system services and for performing hardware dependent tasks; - a
communication module 2414 that is used for connecting thecomputer system 2400 to other computers via the one or more communication interfaces 2404 (wired or wireless) and one or more communication networks, such as the Internet, other wide area networks, local area networks, metropolitan area networks, and so on; - an optional
user interface module 2416 that receives commands from the user via theoptional input devices 2408 and generates user interface objects in theoptional display device 2406; and - a
manufacturing module 2418 that manufactures or otherwise controls manufacturing equipment to manufacture a cord management system, as described with respect to FIGS. 25 and 35-37.
- an
- Each of the above identified elements may be stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices, and corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The set of instructions can be executed by one or more processors (e.g., the CPUs 2402). The above identified modules or programs (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules may be combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments,
memory 2410 may store a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore,memory 2410 may store additional modules and data structures not described above. - Although
Figure 2400 shows a “computer system,”Figure 2400 is intended more as functional description of the various features which may be present in a set of computer systems than as a structural schematic of the embodiments described herein. In practice, and as recognized by those of ordinary skill in the art, items shown separately could be combined and some items could be separated. -
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of amethod 2500 for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the method of manufacturing the cord management system may be performed by thecomputer system 2400. Thecomputer system 2400 forms (2502) a strap. Thecomputer system 2400 then attaches (2504) a first set of magnets to a first location on the strap and attaches (2506) a second set of magnets to a second location on the strap. In some embodiments, the strap includes at least two modes of operation. In a first mode of operation, the first set of magnets is magnetically attached to the second set of magnets so that a first segment of the strap located between the first set of magnets and the second set of magnets forms a loop configured to secure a cord that is wrapped around the strap. In a second mode of operation, the first set of magnets is magnetically detached from the second set of magnets so that the first segment no longer forms the loop. - In some embodiments, the
computer system 2400 forms (2506) magnetic beads. - In some embodiments, the
computer system 2400 forms (2508) magnetic material. - In some embodiments, the
computer system 2400 forms (2510) a cord-attachment mechanism in the strap. - The
method 2500 may be governed by instructions that are stored in a computer readable storage medium and that are executed by one or more processors of one or more computer systems. Each of the operations shown inFIG. 25 may correspond to instructions stored in a computer memory or computer readable storage medium. The computer readable storage medium may include a magnetic or optical disk storage device, solid state storage devices such as Flash memory, or other non-volatile memory device or devices. The computer readable instructions stored on the computer readable storage medium are in source code, assembly language code, object code, or other instruction format that is interpreted and/or executable by one or more processors. -
FIGS. 29-34 illustrate various embodiments of a cord management system that include a case for an object. As disclosed above, there are many types of cases, including, but not limited to, flip cases, zipper cases, skins, open-faced cases, bumpers, and the like. The embodiments illustrated inFIGS. 29-34 provide additional detail to what was described above with relation to the cases ofFIGS. 18A-19F .FIGS. 18A-18B illustrate amagnetic strap 1801 integrated into acase 1802.FIGS. 29A-29I and 30A-30I provide more detail regarding integrated strap and case designs.FIGS. 19A-19F illustrate amagnetic strap 1901 removably attached to acase 1922.FIGS. 31A-31J and 32A-32J provide more detail regarding case designs with removable magnetic straps. Furthermore,FIGS. 33A-33L and 34A-34L illustrate another embodiment for a case design which can be used with a removable magnetic strap. - As stated above,
FIGS. 29A-29I illustrate another embodiment of an integrated case similar to that ofFIGS. 18A-18B .FIG. 29A illustrates astrap 2904 integrated into acase 2902 for an object, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, thestrap 2904 includes magnets (or other magnetic materials) 2908 and 2906 (shown inFIG. 29B ) at attachment points 2912 and 2910 (shown inFIG. 29B ). It should be noted that in any given embodiment only one of the pair of 2906 and 2908 needs to be a magnet, the other may be any magnetic material. The operation of themagnets strap 2904 is similar to the operation of the magnetic straps described above. For example, thestrap 2904 may be folded to form a loop, wherein magnets located at attachment points 2910 and 2912 keep thestrap 2904 in the looped position, as illustrated inFIG. 29A . - The
case 2902 at least partially covers the back side of an object when the object is located within the case. Thestrap 2904 is permanently attached to thecase 2902. In some embodiments, thestrap 2904 is formed as an integral part of thecase 2902. For example, in some embodiments, both the case and the strap are formed together by a molding process. In other embodiments, thestrap 2904 is permanently attached to the case after being manufactured separately. Permanent attachment mechanisms include sewing, joining, fastening, binding, welding, fusing, and similar permanent attachment techniques. In some embodiments, as shown inFIG. 29A , the case includes a cavity 2914. The cavity 2914 is sized to fit thestrap 2904. In some embodiments thecase 2902 is a first color, such as black, while thestrap 2904 is another color, such as pink, blue, orange, green, etc. - In some embodiments, as shown in
FIG. 29B , thestrap 2904, when in an unfolded flat position, lies flush with the exterior surface of thecase 2902. In other embodiments, as shown inFIG. 29C , thestrap 2904 partially protrudes from the cavity 2914, such that a portion of the depth of thestrap 2904 protrudes from the exterior surface of thecase 2902. In still other embodiments, as shown inFIG. 29D , thecase 2902 does not include a cavity, so thestrap 2904 sits on top of the exterior surface of thecase 2902 when in a flat unfolded position. - As shown in
FIG. 29E , in some embodiments, at least one case magnet (or other magnetic material) 2916 is included in thecase 2902. When the strap is in an unfolded flat position, strap magnet/magnetic material 2908 will be magnetically attached to the case magnet/magnetic material 2916. When the case magnet/magnetic material 2916 is included in thecase 2902, thestrap 2904 can be kept in an unfolded position despite gravity and/or movement (as discussed above with respect toFIGS. 15G-H .) The case magnet/magnetic material 2916 may be especially useful in the embodiment shown inFIG. 29E , where no cavity exists in the case because the case magnet/magnetic material 2916 holds thestrap 2904 in its unfolded position. However, some embodiments with a cavity having the same depth as the depth of the strap like that ofFIGS. 29A-29B will include a case magnet/magnetic material 2916. Similarly, embodiments with a cavity having a smaller depth than the depth of the strap, like that ofFIG. 29C , will include a case magnet/magnetic material 2916.FIGS. 29A-29C illustrate embodiments that do not include case magnet/magnetic material 2916. However, alternatives to these figures that include one or more magnets (or other magnetic materials) embedded into the cavity are also envisioned. - It should be noted that while
FIG. 29E illustrates only case magnet/magnetic material 2916, which can be magnetically coupled to strap magnet/magnetic material 2908, in other embodiments an additional case magnet/magnetic material can also be embedded in thecase 2902 and can be magnetically coupled to strap magnet/magnetic material 2906 for any of the embodiments discussed above. It should be noted that in any given embodiment at least one of the coupled pair of a case magnet/magnetic material and a strap magnet/magnetic material should be a magnet, while the other may be substituted with magnetic material. - In any of the embodiments described herein, the
case 2902 can be made of any suitable material such as leather, plastic, rubber, fabric, polymer, metal, etc. In polymer embodiments, the polymer is selected from the group consisting of silicone and an elastomer (e.g., thermoplastic elastomer). In some embodiments, the polymer is resistant to dust. These polymers may be used in manufacturing processes such as injection molding, casting, compression molding, and die cutting (as discussed above with respect toFIGS. 6A-6C ). In fabric embodiments, the fabric may be a Neoprene fabric, leather, silk, cotton, denim, foil, Mylar, and the like. The fabric case will likewise be manufactured by any suitable sewing or joining technique, depending on the fabric chosen. In some embodiments, a combination of the above mentioned materials will be used to cover various portions of the case. For example, as discussed in more detail with respect toFIGS. 33A-L and 34A-L, in some embodiments the case will be a combination of plastic, metal, rubber and/or silicone. In some embodiments, at least a portion of thecase 2902 includes a non-skid material in order to facilitate easy gripping by the user. In some embodiments, at least a portion of thecase 2902 is made of a slippery material having a lower coefficient of friction than another portion of thecase 2902, in order to allow the case to slide easily into and out of a pocket. Furthermore, in embodiments including metal, at least the portion of the case covering the object's antenna (if any), will not be made of metal. In some embodiments, the case will also include a separate finish, such as a painted finish, a scratch resistant finish, a mirrored finish, etc. Note that the term “case” refers to any type of material that covers or partially covers the object. For example, the case may include, but is not limited to flip case, a zipper case, a skin, a bumper, an open-faced case illustrated in these figures, and the like. - The
strap 2904 will likewise be made of any suitable material, including any of the materials described above for the case. In some embodiments, thestrap 2904 will be made of the same material(s) as the case, while in other embodiments the strap will be made of distinct material(s). In some embodiments, the strap is composed of a material that is substantially memoryless. (A material that is memoryless is a material that does not exhibit elastic hysteresis, as discussed above with respect toFIGS. 6A-6C .) In some embodiments, the memoryless material is an elastic polymer. - The elastic polymers embodiments of the case and strap may be manufactured by processes such as injection molding, casting, compression molding, and die cutting (as discussed above with respect to
FIGS. 6A-6C ). The type of manufacturing process selected may depend on factors such as a desired manufacturing volume, manufacturing time, and manufacturing costs of thestrap 2904 and thecase 2902. Additionally, the type of manufacturing process selected may depend on a desired aesthetic design of thestrap 2904 andcase 2902. For example, if the design of the strap requires that the strap magnets/ 2906 and 2908 are to be encapsulated in the material of the strap, an injection molding process may be used. For example, in some embodiments, a two-shot injection molding process is used.magnetic materials - In some embodiments, the strap will have dimensions of 3.09 inches in length, by 0.51 inches in width, and a depth sufficiently thick to hold a magnet/magnetic material embedded therein. In other embodiments, the strap will have dimensions of 2.94 inches in length, by 0.51 inches in width, and a depth sufficiently thick to hold a magnet/magnetic material embedded therein. In still other embodiments, the strap will have dimensions of 3.02 inches in length, by 0.51 inches in width, and a depth sufficiently thick to hold a magnet/magnetic material embedded therein. Thus, in many embodiments, the strap will not have a length of greater than 4 inches or a width of greater than 1 inch. Note that the dimensions of the
strap 2904 may be selected to accommodate cords of varying lengths and thicknesses. The dimensions of thestrap 2904 are also selected to accommodate objects (e.g., portable electronic devices, etc.) of varying sizes. Although not shown in these figures, in some embodiments, thestrap 2904 includes a handle at one end, which is a raised portion or high friction of material of thestrap 2904 that allows a user to grab onto the end of the strap (as discussed with respect toFIGS. 6A-6C ). In some embodiments, the strap includes a notch (e.g., for a fingernail), cut-out, or other surface feature that allows a user to more easily grasp thestrap 2904. Furthermore, although not shown in these figures, the straps need not have uniform thicknesses as shown in these figures, but may also include variable cross-sections, like the embodiments shown inFIGS. 6A-9C . - The magnets of the strap or the case may include any element or composition that is capable of producing a magnetic field. For example, the magnets may include one or more of magnetic metallic elements (e.g., iron, cobalt, nickel, etc.), composite magnets (e.g., ceramic or ferrite magnets, alnico magnets, ticonal magnets, injection molded magnets, flexible magnets), rare earth magnets (e.g., samarium-cobalt magnets, neodymium-iron-boron magnets, etc.), electromagnets, sets of any of these magnets, or any material or composition that produces a magnetic field. Examples of metals that are (or are capable of being) magnetic include, but are not limited to: ferritic stainless steels; martensitic stainless steels; SAE 400 series stainless steels (e.g., SAE Type 416 stainless steel); SAE 1000-9000 series steels (e.g., SAE 1008 steel); alloys of nickel, iron, and/or cobalt; and/or iron.
- In some embodiments, the magnets are Neodymium magnets. In some embodiments, the Neodymium magnets are a grade N42. In some embodiments, the magnets are solid magnets. In some embodiments, the magnets are selected from the group consisting of donut (ring) magnets, horseshoe-shaped (U-shaped) magnets, cylindrical magnets, disc-shaped magnets, rectangular magnets, and the like. In some embodiments, the magnets are sets of magnets. The selection of the size, shape, and number of the magnets may depend on factors including, but not limited to, a desired magnetic strength, a desired form factor, a desired aesthetic, and the manufacturing process used to produce the strap.
- Although not required, one or more of the case and strap “magnets” (e.g. 2906, 2908, or 2916) can be made of a magnetic material rather than a magnet. The magnetic material can be made of any material that produces a magnetic field in response to an applied magnetic field. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is selected from the group consisting of a ferromagnetic material and a paramagnetic material. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is low-carbon steel. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is Vanadium carbonyl. The magnetic material may be any shape, including, but not limited to, a disc, a square, a rectangle, a decorative shape, and the like. The size and shape of the magnetic material may be selected based on factors including, but not limited to, an aesthetic design of the case and strap. Furthermore, as described in more detail, with respect to
FIGS. 33A-33L , the entire case back, or a portion thereof, can be made of a magnetic material. - In some embodiments, as shown in the top view of
FIG. 29F , thecase 2902 will include a cord-attachment mechanism 2918 to secure a cord (and/or a connector for a cord) to thecase 2902. Furthermore, in some embodiments, the cord-attachment mechanism 2918 also secures a cord (and/or a connector for a cord) to the object within thecase 2902 in addition to any securing mechanisms the object itself may include to secure a cord (and/or a connector for a cord) to the object. In some embodiments, the cord-attachment mechanism 2918 will have slits such as one slit, two slits configured as an “X” or a “+,” slits in the shape of a star etc. to accommodate cords or connectors of cords of varying sizes as discussed with respect toFIGS. 10A-11C . Similarly, other mechanisms to accommodate cords or connectors of cords of varying sizes, such as the grommets discussed with respect toFIGS. 11A-11C may be used. In other embodiments, as shown here, asimple hole 2918 in the case is provided. In some embodiments, thishole 2918 is larger than the cord or connector for the cord, and does not substantially contribute to securing the cord to the object or the case. In other embodiments, thehole 2918 is dimensioned smaller than the cord or the connector for the cord and is made of an elastic material such that thehole 2918 expands as the cord (or the connector for the cord) is inserted into thehole 2918 thus securing the cord to the case. Note that the diameter of thehole 2918 may be determined based on factors including the range of diameters for cords and/or connectors for the cords to be used with the case. In some embodiments, the cord-attachment mechanism 2918 is formed from an elastic polymer (e.g., by injecting an elastic polymer into a mold for the case.) For example, the elastic polymer may be the elastic polymers described above. In some embodiments, the cord-attachment mechanism 2918 is composed of the same polymer as the case or strap. In some embodiments, the cord-attachment mechanism is composed of different, but compatible, polymers. - In some embodiments, as shown in
FIG. 29G , the case includes holes for object elements such as speakers, a dock/charger connector, a camera/lens, an LED/flash, a ringer mode switch, an on/off switch, etc. In some embodiments, one hole will accommodate more than one element. For example, in the embodiment ofFIG. 29G , a large bottom hole 2920 is configured to expose the dock/charger connector and the speakers. Similarly, in the embodiment ofFIG. 29G , a single back hole 2922 is configured to expose the LED/flash and the camera/lens.FIG. 29G also illustrates aside hole 2924 which is configured to expose the ringer mode switch. Alternative embodiments will provide differently shaped holes such as a larger and/or differently shaped hole for the LED/flash and camera/lens and a larger and/or differently shaped hole for the dock/charger connector and the speakers. Similarly, in other embodiments, separate holes are provided for each of the LED/flash and the camera/lens. Likewise, in some embodiments, separate holes are provided for each of the speakers and the dock charger. In some embodiments holes will also be provided for access to volume buttons. The exact dimensions and placement of the holes is determined based on the specific requirements of the object inserted into thecase 2902. For example, in cases designed to house an object with a track wheel (e.g., a track wheel for a thumb placed on the side of the object), a track wheel hole is also included in the case. Similarly, for objects that include a touch screen or touch sensitive area for controlling the object's functions, holes will be provided to access these elements as well. In some embodiments, a large hole is provided in the front of the case for viewing the screen (whether touch sensitive or otherwise). In some embodiments, the front of the case may include a transparent screen cover. In some embodiments, the camera hole may include a small built in lens to improve the quality of pictures taken with the object's built-in camera lens. In some embodiments, the edges of the holes are beveled, re-enforced with a stronger material, or covered with a protective coating. These additions allow the holes to withstand greater wear and tear during use than the case could otherwise withstand. In some embodiments, the case may include a hole to allow a support stand element to pass through the case. - As shown in
FIGS. 29F and 29G , in some embodiments certain elements, such as buttons, rather than just being available through a hole as described above, are instead covered.FIG. 29F illustrates a cover 2926 over a button on the top edge of an object, andFIG. 29G illustrates 2928 and 2930 over buttons on a side edge of the object. In some embodiments, the button covers (e.g., 2926, 2928, and 2930) are made of a pliable material such as rubber or silicone. In other embodiments, the button covers are made of a rigid material such as plastic or metal. Any of the above mentioned materials discussed with respect to thecovers case 2906 may be used for the button covers. The button covers keep the object within the cover more protected from dirt, debris, and moisture which could otherwise accumulate. Furthermore, the button covers protect the buttons from scratches. Similarly, in some embodiments, the holes for the camera, LED/flash, and screen are covered with a transparent material such as glass or transparent plastic to similarly protect the device. In some embodiments, the button covers are recessed with respect to the exterior surface of the case as shown inFIG. 29H , such that the button covers 2928 and 2930 do not stick out past the profile of thecase 2902, and are thus less likely to be inadvertently pressed. In other embodiments, as shown inFIGS. 29F and 29G , the button covers are not recessed with respect to the exterior surface of the case. It should be noted that in some embodiments, the button covers are colored differently from the case in order to make them easier for a user to locate, and to add to the aesthetic appeal of the case. - As stated above, the operation of the
strap 2904 is similar to the operation of the straps described above with respect to almost all of the figures in this application. For example, thestrap 2904 may be folded to form a loop, securing a cord wrapped around thecase 2902 as illustrated inFIG. 29I . Also, as discussed above, while magnetic attachment mechanisms are described as existing at the attachment points 2910 and 2912 (shown inFIG. 29B ), other attachment mechanisms are also envisioned. In other embodiments snaps, hook and loop mechanisms, Velcro, adhesives, magnetic beads, suction devices, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms, buttons, buckles, springs, bistable springs (e.g., a slap bracelet), sleeves that insert into slots, pegs that are inserted into holes, hinges, and snaps may be used. For example, in some embodiments, a hook portion of a Velcro attachment is provided at attachment point 2910 while a loop portion of a Velcro attachment point is provided at 2912 (or vice versa). When the two attachment points are brought into contact with one another, they will keep thestrap 2904 in a looped position as shown inFIG. 29A . In another example, in some embodiments, a stud portion of a snap attachment is provided at attachment point 2910 while a socket portion of a snap attachment point is provided at 2912 (or vice versa). When the two attachment points are brought into contact with one another, they will keep thestrap 2904 in a looped position as shown inFIG. 29A . In another example, in some embodiments, a button is provided at attachment point 2910 while a button hole is provided at 2912 (or vice versa). When these two attachment points are brought into contact with one another, they will keep thestrap 2904 in a looped position as shown inFIG. 29A . -
FIGS. 30A-30I illustrate embodiments of a case similar toFIGS. 29A-29I , with the exception that the object for which the case is made has different dimensions than the object shown inFIGS. 29A-29I . -
FIGS. 31A-31J illustrate an embodiment of a case similar toFIGS. 29A-29I above except that in these embodiments the strap is semi-permanently, rather than permanently attached to the case. - In some embodiments, the semi-permanent attachment is done by means of a case magnet 3106 having a strength greater than the case magnets discussed above, or by using larger or multiple magnets. In some embodiments, the stronger case magnet 3106 is three to ten times stronger than the case and strap magnets discussed with respect to
FIGS. 29A-I (e.g. 2906, 2908, and 2916). Note that the combination of the grade (i.e., the composition of materials, wherein a higher number for the grade indicates a higher magnetic strength per unit volume), the diameters, the shape, and the thickness of a magnet determines the magnetic strength of the magnet. Thus, the magnetic strength of a larger magnet (e.g., larger surface area, diameter, and/or thickness) may have greater magnetic strength than a smaller magnet of a similar grade. In some embodiments, to achieve a stronger force between case magnet 3106 and strap magnet/magnetic material 3110, case magnet 3106 can comprise high grade magnets (e.g., higher “N” number), or magnets with larger surface area, diameter, or thickness. In some embodiments, case magnet 3106 can comprise multiple magnets or any other configuration, material, or combination of materials that provides a greater magnetic force between case magnet 3106 and strap magnet/magnetic material 3110. - In some embodiments, as shown in
FIG. 31A , the stronger case magnet 3106 is embedded withincavity 3114. In other embodiments, no cavity is provided, and the case magnet is embedded into a portion of the case. In some embodiments, thecase 3102 also includes another magnet ormagnetic material 3108 embedded in thecavity 3114, and being similar to the magnets and magnetic materials discussed above. As discussed above, the magnet/magnetic material 3108 is weak enough that magnet/magnetic material 3112 of thestrap 3104 can be easily detached therefrom in order to form a loop for holding a cord (similar to the embodiment shown inFIG. 29I ). However, the stronger case magnet 3106 is strong enough that a much greater force must be exerted to detach strap magnet/magnetic material 3110 from stronger case magnet 3106, thus making thestrap 3104 unlikely to become detached from thecase 3102 unless the user specifically detaches it. It should be noted that in some embodiments, the strap magnet/magnetic material 3110 is also stronger than the magnets discussed with respect toFIGS. 29A-I , thus making the connection between strap magnet/magnetic material 3110 and case magnet 3106 even harder to detach. -
FIG. 31B shows a strap, held in acase 3102 having acavity 3114, which is the depth of the strap 3104 (such that thestrap 3104 in an unfolded flat position lies flush with the exterior surface of the case 3102).FIG. 31C shows an embodiment in which thecavity 3114 has a smaller depth than the strap, such that a portion of the depth of thestrap 3104 protrudes from the exterior surface of thecase 3102. InFIG. 31D , thecase 3102 does not include a cavity, so thestrap 3104 sits on the surface of the exterior surface of thecase 3102 when in a flat unfolded position, as shown. In each of these embodiments, the second magnet/magnetic material, case magnet/magnetic material 3108, is optional. - In other embodiments, as shown in
FIG. 31E , the semi-permanent attachment(s) are non-magnetic attachment area(s) 3116 and 3118 on thestrap 3104 with a corresponding attachment area(s) 3120 and 3122 on thecase 3102. In some embodiments, the non-magnetic attachment mechanisms include snaps (as shown here). In other embodiments, they include hook and loop mechanisms, Velcro, adhesives, magnetic beads, suction devices, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms, buttons, buckles, springs, bistable springs (e.g., a slap bracelet), sleeves that insert into slots, plastic interlocking strip fasteners (e.g., Ziploc® brand closure mechanisms), pegs that are inserted into holes, or hinges. InFIG. 31E , an embodiment of the case is illustrated in which two 3120 and 3122 are included withinnon-magnetic attachment areas cavity 3114. In other embodiments, only onenon-magnetic attachment area 3120 may be used. Furthermore, in some embodiments, anon-magnetic attachment area 3120 is also included in embodiments that do not have a cavity. In some embodiments, when thecase 3102 does not have a cavity, thenon-magnetic attachment area 3120 can be a separate attachment device (similar to themagnetic material 1524 ofFIGS. 15 and 16 ). The user can then attach thisnon-magnetic attachment area 3120 on any portion of the device desired.FIG. 31F illustrates anon-magnetic attachment area 3120 located in the center of the back of thecase 3102. - In other embodiments, the semi-permanent attachment is a non-magnetic mechanism on one
edge 3124 ofstrap 3104 andcavity 3114 as shown inFIG. 31G . In some embodiments, theedge attachment mechanism 3124 is a zipper, plastic interlocking strip fastener (e.g., Ziploc® brand closure mechanism), hook and loop mechanism, adhesive, magnetic strip, suction device, buckle, sleeve that inserts into a slot, hinges, etc. -
FIG. 31H shows an embodiment where the case includes acavity 3114 that also exposes a headphone jack or similar cord-attachment area 3126 of the object. In these embodiments, any of the straps discussed with respect toFIGS. 6-9 can be used in conjunction with the case. Specifically, the embodiments ofFIGS. 6-9 include a cord-attachment mechanism (e.g. 609) located at one end of the strap, where the cord-attachment mechanism is configured to removably attach the strap to the cord and sometimes also to the object. As such, when astrap 3104 with a cord-attachment mechanism 3128 is used with thecase 3102 having acavity 3114 that exposes a cord-attachment area 3126, one mechanism for semi-permanent attachment of thestrap 3104 to thecase 3102 is the cord-attachment mechanism (609, 709, 810, 909 respectively) of thestrap 3104 used in conjunction with a cord (or the connector for the cord) that is inserted therein, as shown inFIG. 31I . In some embodiments the cord-attachment mechanism 3128 is used in conjunction with the magnetic or non-magnetic semi-permanent attachments discussed above. For example,FIG. 31J shows an embodiment of thecase 3102 without acavity 3114 in which thestrap 3104 is semi-permanently attached to thecase 3102 by means of the cord (or the connector for the cord), cord-attachment mechanism 3128 and at least one magnet/magnetic material of thestrap 3112. -
FIGS. 32A-32J illustrate embodiments of a case similar toFIGS. 31A-31J , with the exception that the object for which the case is made has different dimensions than the object shown inFIGS. 31A-31J . -
FIGS. 33A-33L illustrate other embodiments of acase 3302 that can be paired with a removable, detachable, orsemi-permanent strap 3304.FIG. 33A illustrates the case with a back 3306 made of a magnet or of a magnetic material, referred to herein as a magnetic material back 3306. The magnetic material back 3306 can be made of any ferromagnetic material and/or paramagnetic material. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is low-carbon steel. In some embodiments, the magnetic material is Vanadium carbonyl. In some embodiments, the magnetic material back 3306 is made of a pliable material such as rubber, silicone, an elastomer (e.g., thermoplastic elastomer), or other pliable materials discussed above, wherein the pliable material encapsulates small magnets or magnetic material elements within it. For example, in some embodiments the back is made of an elastomer or paint with iron flecks in it. It should be noted that although the back is discussed in detail herein, other portions of the case may also be made of a magnet or magnetic material. For example, in some embodiments, substantially all of the case, including the sides and front, is made of a metal magnetic material (with the exception of portions near or over a device's antenna). In some embodiments, all of the case is made of a magnetic material, such as a magnetic metal. Furthermore, in some embodiments only a portion of the back of the case includes the magnetic material back 3306. For example, in alternative embodiments the magnetic material back 3306 covers only three-quarters, half, one quarter, or less of the back of the object. - In some embodiments, the case includes a bumper to at least partially prevent a surface of the object (contained within the case) from contacting the magnetic material of the case. When substantially all of a case is made of metal, it may be advantageous to include a bumper or padding on the portions of the case that contact or interface with the object within the case. The bumper can reduce the likelihood that the metal case will scratch, scrape, and/or score the surface of an object within the case. In some embodiments, the bumper can act as an impact buffer, reducing the likelihood of damage to an object should the case be dropped when it is holding the object. In some embodiments, the bumper is a piece of foam, rubber, plastic, fabric, and/or leather on a surface of the case, and configured to be disposed between the case and the object when the object is in the case.
- A
case 3302 with a magnetic material back 3306 allows a user to position astrap 3304 on any desired portion of the magnetic material back that the user desires, like magnets on a refrigerator door. In other words, as long as thestrap 3304 includes at least one 3308 or 3310, the strap can be placed in any position on the magnetic material back 3306. For example,magnet FIG. 33B illustrates thestrap 3304 in a similar position to the straps shown inFIGS. 29A-32J (to facilitate retaining a cord wrapped horizontally around the case). Alternatively, thestrap 3304 can be placed horizontally on the magnetic material back 3306 as shown inFIG. 33C , which would facilitate retaining a cord wrapped vertically around the case. Furthermore, as shown inFIG. 33D , thestrap 3304 can also be positioned in the middle of the magnetic material back 3306. A variety of other positions of the strap should be apparent to one of skill in the art. - Another advantage of a
case 3302 with a magnetic material back 3306 is that various types of the straps can be equally well accommodated. For example,FIG. 33E shows astrap 3304 including a cord-attachment mechanism 3312, like those straps shown inFIGS. 6-9 (e.g. cord-attachment mechanism 609), used in conjunction with the magnetic material back 3306. WhereasFIG. 33B shows astrap 3304 that does not include a cord-attachment mechanism, similar those straps shown inFIGS. 17-19 , also used in conjunction with the magnetic material back 3306. - Furthermore, not only can the
strap 3304 be positioned by a user such that it neatly holds a wrapped cord when the cord is attached to an object as shown inFIG. 33F , but this design also allows a user to position thestrap 3304 in optimal positions for holding the cord when it is not attached to the object. For example, the user may place thestrap 3304 in the middle of the magnetic material back 3306 for holding an unplugged looped cord, as shown inFIG. 33G . - In some embodiments, the magnetic material back 3306 is exposed as shown in
FIG. 33A , while in other embodiments the magnetic material back 3306 is encapsulated in anencapsulating material 3314 as shown inFIG. 33H . In some embodiments, the encapsulatingmaterial 3314 is pliable material such as rubber, leather, plastic, polymer, fabric (silk, cotton, denim, foil, Mylar, Neoprene fabric), etc. In other embodiments, the encapsulatingmaterial 3314 is a rigid material such as glass, plastic, metal, mirrored material, etc. In some embodiments, the encapsulating material is waterproof and/or scratch resistant. The encapsulatingmaterial 3314 may also protect the metal back while also holding it in place. In some embodiments, the encapsulating material is made of a non-skid type surface (i.e. the material has a high coefficient of friction) such as rubber or silicone to assist the user in holding the object. Alternatively, in some embodiments the encapsulating material has a relatively low coefficient of friction such as leather or plastic in order to allow the case to slide easily into and out of a pocket. Some embodiments include a combination of the above mentioned encapsulating materials on different portions of the case 3302 (as discussed in more detail with respect toFIGS. 30K and 30L ). Furthermore, in some embodiments the materials are made of different colors. The different colored portions of the case may add aesthetic appeal to the case, and may serve to distinguish the various portions of the case from one another. In some embodiments, the magnetic material back 3306 is held in place by a rim of encapsulating material stretched around the edge of the magnetic material back 3306. In other words, in these embodiments, the encapsulating material does not cover the back, but instead frames it. - In some embodiments, rather than having an encapsulating
material 3314 over the magnetic material back 3306, the magnetic material back 3306 is covered with a coating material such as an opaque or translucent paint, polyurethane, scratch resistant gloss, etc. In some embodiments, the coating is applied directly to the surface of the back prior to the back being joined to thecase 3302. In some embodiments, while the coating may protect the back, it does not necessarily hold it in place in the same manner as the encapsulating material. As such, in some embodiments, a portion of thecase 3302 is molded over the magnetic material back 3306 such that the magnetic material back 3306 is held in place. Thecase 3302 can be made of any of the materials discussed with respect toFIGS. 29A-29I . Some of these materials may be especially well suited for holding the metal back in place. For example, in some embodiments, the rim ofcase 3302 that contacts the magnetic material back 3306 is made of an elastomer material such as rubber or silicone that is molded over the edges of the magnetic material back 3306. - In other embodiments, rather than being over molded, melted, welded, or otherwise permanently attached to the
case 3302, the back is slidably connected to thecase 3302. For example, in some embodiments, the magnetic material back 3306 fits into apocket 3316 or tracks in thecase 3302 as shown inFIG. 33I . This figure illustrates the magnetic material back 3306 in a position to be inserted into thepocket 3316 to clearly illustrate the pocket element of this embodiment, although when in use the magnetic material back 3306 would be slid entirely or substantially entirely into thepocket 3316. In some embodiments, the back might also slide into place from a side opening pocket rather than the top opening pocket shown inFIG. 33I . Furthermore, in some embodiments, thepocket 3316 itself has one or more holes exposing the back. For example, in some embodiments thepocket 3316 includes a large hole making the pocket more like a picture frame encapsulating the magnetic material back 3306, wherein the magnetic material back 3306 is slid into tracks in the pocket or frame. In other embodiments, thepocket 3316 will include one or two large sides to keep the magnetic material back 3306 more firmly in place, as shown inFIG. 33I . For example, the pocket may include an external transparent plastic side, which can be seen through, and which does not significantly diminish the magnetic properties of the magnetic material back 3306, but which holds the magnetic material back 3306 of the case firmly against the object's back. This transparent plastic side also protects the back from scratches and may also be waterproof. - In some embodiments, as shown in
FIG. 33J , one portion 3318 of the magnetic material back 3306 is distinct from the rest of the back. In some embodiments, the portion 3318, is covered in a heartier covering that is more resistant to scratches such as a polymer coating, a translucent paint, polyurethane, a scratch resistant gloss, etc. Additionally or alternatively, in some embodiments the portion 3318 is painted or dyed a different color from the rest of the magnetic material back 3306 to show the ideal spot for thestrap 3304 to be attached or for decorative purposes. In some embodiments, the portion 3318 includes a slight indentation (similar to the cavities described above) to indicate a suggested spot for the magnetic strap to attach. Similarly, in some embodiments, the portion 3318 includes a slight raised area to indicate a suggested spot for the magnetic strap to attach. In some embodiments, the portion 3318 is made of one or more magnets, while the remainder of the magnetic material back 3306 is made of a magnetic material. - In some embodiments, the remainder of the case, i.e., the portions of the case excluding the magnetic material back 3306, is made of one or more non-magnetic materials. For example, portions of the case can include a pliable material, which will help facilitate the insertion of an object into the case, especially in embodiments where the magnetic material back 3306 of the
case 3302 is rigid. In some embodiments, the remainder of the case is made of a combination of pliable materials and rigid materials. For example, as shown inFIG. 33K , portions of the band surrounding the top, bottom, and side edges of the object are made of pliable or stretchable material such as a rubber material, while other portions are made of a rigid material such as a plastic material.FIG. 33L illustrates the different portions of this embodiment in an exploded view, which further illustrates which portions of thecase 3302 are made of plastic (or similar non-magnetic rigid materials) and which are made of silicone/rubber (or similar non-magnetic pliable materials). -
FIGS. 34A-34L illustrate embodiments of a case similar toFIGS. 33A-33L with the exception that the object for which the case is made has different dimensions than the object shown inFIGS. 33A-33L . - In some embodiments, at least a portion of a cord management system includes a color-changing material that changes color when it is subjected to different environmental conditions. Color-changing materials can be employed in order to give an item, such as a case or strap for a cord management system, an attractive, decorative appearance. As described in greater detail below, color-changing materials can be designed or selected in order to display dynamic color schemes on the case. For instance, when a user holds a mobile electronic device case that incorporates a thermochromic material, the heat from a user's hand may cause a handprint to appear on the case in a distinct color (or colors) from other portions of the case. Also, in some embodiments, the case is configured so that a user can use a finger, flashlight, laser, heat pen, heat brush, or other object to “draw” on the case. The various uses and applications for a case with a color-changing material can add an element of novelty and attractiveness to the cord management system, and can increase the appeal and entertainment value of such cases. Also, thermochromic materials are used in some embodiments to provide information to a user of a device, for example by indicating a temperature of a device. Color-changing materials, including thermochromic materials, are disclosed in greater detail herein.
- In some embodiments, a cord management system includes a case for a mobile electronic device. Mobile electronic devices include any of a class of electronic devices that are small and light enough to be easily transported with a person. A mobile electronic device is a self contained electronic device which usually has one or more of: a screen, buttons, a touch screen, a keyboard, a speaker, a lens, and a microphone. They are often battery powered, and often include electronic components (e.g., batteries, processors, memory, circuit boards, and the like) surrounded by a cover or housing. In some embodiments, a mobile electronic device is an audio player, a portable video player, a handheld gaming system, a navigation device, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, an e-book reader, a personal digital assistant, a camera, a camcorder, and/or a handheld video projector. Mobile electronic device cases are often used to protect, cover, and/or accessorize mobile electronic devices.
-
FIG. 38 illustrates acase 3802 that includes a color-changing material on aportion 3804 of the case, according to some embodiments. The color-changing material is indicated by wavy lines. In this embodiment, thecolor changing portion 3804 is the back of thecase 3802. In some embodiments, other portions of thecase 3802 may include color-changing material. For example, in some embodiments, theentire case 3802 includes color-changing material. In some embodiments, one or more edges of thecase 3802 include color-changing material. In some embodiments, one or more buttons or button covers on thecase 3802 include color-changing material. - In some embodiments, the color-changing material is a thermochromic material. Thermochromic materials are materials that change color due to changes in the temperature of the material and/or the environment surrounding the material. In some embodiments, the color-changing material is a photochromic material. Photochromic materials change color due to a change in the wavelength and/or intensity of light incident on the material. Photochromic materials are discussed in greater detail herein. As used herein, a change in color corresponds to any change in hue, brightness, shade, tint, and/or saturation that is detectable by the human eye. In some embodiments, a change in color of a material corresponds to a change from one Pantone color standard to another Pantone color standard. In some embodiments, a color changing material will change to (or will transition between) a first color (e.g., black) and a second color (e.g., green). In some embodiments, a color changing material will transition between additional colors, for example, changing between black and green and purple and blue.
- In some embodiments, other coatings or materials that provide interesting or decorative visual characteristics are used. For example, in some embodiments, materials that exhibit geometric metameric failure are used. Such materials appear to a viewer to be different colors depending on the viewing angle, the viewing distance, and/or the lighting angle. As used herein, materials exhibiting geometric metameric failure (including paints, coatings, dyes, etc.) are referred to as metameric materials.
- Attention is now drawn to
FIG. 39 , which illustrates acase 3902 that includes a thermochromic material according to some embodiments. Thecase 3902 shows thecase 3902 in a state when more than one color is visible. As shown inFIG. 39 , thecase 3902 shows afirst portion 3904 of the case that is a first color, a second portion 3906 of the case that is a second color, and a third portion 3908 of the case that is an intermediate color (or a plurality of intermediate colors). In some embodiments, the first, second, and third portions of the case correspond to different temperatures. For example, in some embodiments, thefirst portion 3904 of the case corresponds to a first temperature, such as a temperature around 70 degrees Fahrenheit, while the second portion 3906 of the case corresponds to a second temperature which is higher than the first temperature, such as a temperature around 95 degrees Fahrenheit. Also, the third portion 3908 of the case, corresponding to the intermediate (or plurality of intermediate colors) corresponds to temperatures between 70 and 95 degrees Fahrenheit. The lines between the first and second portions of the case shown inFIG. 39 are intended merely as a functional illustration the color-changing properties of a case in accordance with some embodiments, and are not intended to show exact color boundaries or temperature gradients. - In some embodiments, a color-changing material is incorporated in a case in such a way that a design becomes visible or not visible (or less visible) only when certain environmental conditions exist.
FIG. 40 illustrates acase 4002 where adesign 4004 is incorporated in a thermochromic material on thecase 4002, according to some embodiments. Thedesign 4004 is set against abackground 4005. In some embodiments, thebackground 4005 refers to an area of the case that is near or adjacent to the design. In some embodiments, at least part of thedesign 4004 is thermochromic material. In some embodiments, at least part of thebackground 4005 is thermochromic material. In some embodiments, both thedesign 4004 and thebackground 4005 include some portions that are thermochromic material. -
FIG. 40 shows how thedesign 4004 may be visible on a portion of the case having a first temperature, and not visible (or less visible) on a portion of the case having a second temperature. For example,FIG. 40 shows afirst portion 4006 of the case and asecond portion 4008 of the case. Thefirst portion 4006 corresponds to thecase 4002 having a first temperature, where thedesign 4004 is visible as indicated by the solid lines of thedesign 4004. Thesecond portion 4008 corresponds to the case having a second temperature, where thedesign 4004 is not visible (or less visible) as indicated by the dashed lines of thedesign 4004. A user could cause thedesign 4004 to appear or disappear, for example, by using his or her hand to heat up such a case. - In some embodiments, the
design 4004 is made of (or includes) a color-changing material that is the same color as thebackground 4005 when the color-changing material is subject to a first environmental condition, and is a different color from the rest of the case when thebackground 4005 is subject to another environmental condition. Thus, thedesign 4004 will appear to be the same color as the background 4005 (i.e., not visible or less visible) or appear to be a different color than the background 4005 (i.e., visible) based on the specific environmental condition of the color-changing material. On the other hand, in some embodiments, thebackground 4005 is made of (or includes) a color-changing material that is the same color as thedesign 4004 when the color-changing material is subject to a first environmental condition, and is a different color from thedesign 4004 when the case is subject to another environmental condition. In some embodiments, both thedesign 4004 and thebackground 4005 are made of (or include) a color-changing material. In these embodiments, the color changing materials each display different colors at different environmental conditions, and/or different colors at the same environmental conditions. - In the foregoing description, the flower design is merely exemplary, and the design could be any design. In some embodiments, the design is any of: representational designs (e.g., flowers, animals, faces), non-representational designs (e.g., dots, lines, patterns), and informational designs (e.g., words, logos, trademarks).
-
FIG. 41 illustrates an embodiment where different portions of thecase 4102 include different color-changing materials. Thefirst portion 4104 includes a first color-changing material, thesecond portion 4106 includes a second color-changing material, and thethird portion 4108 includes a third color-changing material. In some embodiments, the three portions each display a different color from one another when thecase 4102 is at a first environmental condition. In some embodiments, the three portions each display a different color from one another when thecase 4102 is at a second environmental condition. In some embodiments, each portion ofcase 4102 displays one color at the first environmental condition, and another color at the second environmental condition. In some embodiments, thermochromic material is used so that the portions of the case change color in response to different temperatures. For example, in some embodiments, at a first temperature, thefirst portion 4104 is red, thesecond portion 4106 is green, and thethird portion 4108 is blue. At a second temperature, thefirst portion 4104 is orange, thesecond portion 4106 is yellow, and thethird portion 4108 is black. In some embodiments, only two portions of thecase 4102 include color-changing materials, while in other embodiments, three or more portions of the case include color-changing material. - In some embodiments, the color-changing material is a thermochromic material that is configured to change color in response to a temperature change caused by the device within the case. For example, mobile electronic devices often heat up when they are in use, such as when a user is making a telephone call on a mobile telephone. In some cases, the increased temperature of the device (and the case holding the device) is caused by the heating up of a battery during use. Thus, for example, a case can be designed for a mobile electronic device where the thermochromic material is designed to change color in accordance with the increased battery temperature typical for that device.
- In some embodiments, a case includes a design that displays certain colors, symbols, and/or designs to indicate the temperature of the device. Such a design may provide a user with other information about the device as well. For example, since the temperature of a battery powered electronic device may increase over a period of time, the temperature of the device (and accordingly of a case holding the device) may be used as a proxy for the duration that a device has been in use. Thus, a thermochromic material is sometimes used to indicate how long a user has been using an electronic device.
-
FIG. 42 illustrates acase 4202 including adesign 4204, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, thedesign 4204 is a temperature indicating design that illustrates the temperature of the device, and therefore, in some embodiments, the duration that a device has been in use. Thedesign 4204 inFIG. 42 uses shapes of increasing size to indicate increased device temperature, although any suitable differentiation could be used. Thedesign 4204 is shown when thecase 4202 is in an intermediate temperature state. At this state, the first three bars are visible as indicated by the solid lines, and the two largest bars (indicating a higher temperature) are not visible, as indicated by the dashed lines. Thus, thedesign 4204 may indicate a certain temperature of the device, and thus indicate to a user how long the device has been in use. - Throughout the present discussion, the different designs and colors that are incorporated into a case may be selected based on design preferences, material constraints, and/or desired operating temperatures. Furthermore, specific temperature ranges in which designs and colors are displayed may be subject to particular design choices. These design choices are all considered to be within the scope of the invention. For instance, in some embodiments, a design may be visible at a higher temperature and not visible (or less visible) at a lower temperature. Alternatively, a design may be visible at a lower temperature and not visible (or less visible) at a higher temperature. In some embodiments, a case can be configured to display multiple different designs based on different temperatures of combinations of temperatures.
- In some embodiments, it is preferable that the heat produced by the electronic device does not cause a thermochromic material to change color. For instance, in some embodiments the heat of a user's hand is the main cause of a color change on a case. Also, in some embodiments, a case may incorporate a temperature indicating design for indicating the temperature of the air surrounding the case. Accordingly, it may be beneficial for the portion of the case comprising thermochromic material to be least partially thermally insulated from the electronic device within the case in order to limit the effect of a battery's heat on the thermochromic material. Insulating materials are discussed in greater detail herein with reference to
FIG. 43 . -
FIG. 43 illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of portion of some embodiments of a case. In some embodiments, the case includes aprotective coating 4302, an ultra-violetradiation inhibiting coating 4304, a color-changingmaterial 4306, amagnetic material portion 4308, apolymer portion 4310, and an insulatingelement 4312. - In some embodiments, the
protective coating 4302 is an at least semi-transparent coating, painting, covering, sealer, film, sheet, and/or finish. Theprotective coating 4302 is sometimes designed to help prevent scratches, dents, or other damage to an underlying layer (e.g., thecolor changing material 4306, an alternative paint layer, and/or a magnetic material portion 4308). In some embodiments, theprotective coating 4302 helps prevent underlying layers from peeling and/or flaking. In some embodiments, theprotective coating 4302 includes the ultra-violet inhibitingcoating 4304, or otherwise includes an ultra-violet radiation inhibiting material. In these embodiments, the two coatings may only be a single layer of material. In some embodiments, theprotective coating 4302 is urethane, polyester, lacquer, epoxy, resin, plastic, and/or glass. - The color-changing
material 4306 is a material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions, as described in more detail below. The color-changingmaterial 4306 is, in some embodiments, a thermochromic material, a photochromic material, or a metameric material. In some embodiments, the color-changingmaterial 4306 is a paint, coating, and/or film layer component of a case. Also, the color-changingmaterial 4306 is substituted with a standard, non-color-changing material in some embodiments. - In some embodiments, the ultra-violet
radiation inhibiting coating 4304 prevents or limits the transmission of ultra-violet radiation to subsequent layers or coatings of the case. In some embodiments, the color-changingmaterial 4306 degrades when exposed to ultra-violet radiation, resulting in diminished color changing properties. In some embodiments, other colors, paints, and/or designs fade when exposed to ultra-violet radiation. Thus, ultra-violetradiation inhibiting coating 4304 helps limit the damaging effects of ultra-violet radiation. - In some embodiments, a case includes a
magnetic material portion 4308 and apolymer portion 4310. The specific materials for a case in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are discussed in greater detail elsewhere in this application, and will not be discussed in detail here. - In some embodiments, the insulating
element 4312 is an insulator such as glass, fiberglass, plastic, elastomer, and/or rubber. In some embodiments, a case is configured such that an air gap exists between the thermochromic material and a device within the case. The air gap insulates the device from the thermochromic material, and can be used in addition to or instead of the insulatingelement 4312. Thus, in some embodiments, the case does not include an insulating element 44312. - In some embodiments, the insulating
element 4312 is a portion of a case that has a color-changing material. For example, a plastic or polymer case may have a color-changing paint on an outer surface, and the plastic or polymer that makes up the case may act as an insulating element. - It is understood that not all of the materials or components illustrated in this cross section are necessarily used in all embodiments of the present invention. For example, some embodiments of a case do not include magnetic materials. Furthermore, additional components not identified or discussed here may likewise be incorporated without departing from the spirit of the invention.
- In some embodiments, a color-changing material is incorporated in a skin that is applied to a portion of the case.
FIG. 44A illustrates acase 4402 with adecorative skin 4404, where theskin 4404 is partially attached to thecase 4402. In some embodiments, theskin 4404 is applied to a portion of the case using magnets, adhesives, or other embedding or coating methods. In some embodiments, theskin 4404 includes a magnet ormagnetic material 4406 that can removably attach theskin 4404 to a case for a mobile electronic device that has a magnetic material back. In some embodiments, theskin 4404 is incorporated into the case such that it is not easily or conveniently removed. For instance, thedecorative skin 4404 can be permanently or semi-permanently applied to a case for a mobile electronic device. For example, theskin 4404 is sometimes glued or adhered to the case with adhesives, adhered to the case using a static force, or applied to the case and then securely covered by a coating. - In some embodiments, the
decorative skin 4404 further comprises one or more edges defining through-holes 4405 between the first and second sides, wherein the one or more through-holes 4405 are configured to allow optical access through theskin 4404 by a component of the mobile electronic device. For example, the through-holes are sometimes positioned so that a lens and/or a flash component of a mobile electronic device are not covered by the skin. - In some embodiments, at least a portion of the non-contacting side of the skin includes a thermochromic material. In some embodiments, the skin does not include a thermochromic material, but has another design and/or decoration instead. Designs may include, but are not limited to, representational designs, non-representational designs, and informational designs. Such designs may include a color, word, picture, photograph, outline, shape, image, and/or logo. In some embodiments, decorative skins include a magnet or
magnetic material 4406 as an attachment mechanism allowing them to attach to and decorate and/or personalize a case for an object. In some embodiments, the case has a magnetic material surface such as a magnetic material back, and skins are magnetically attached to the case via the magnetic material surface. In some embodiments, the attachment mechanism is selected from any of: adhesive, Velcro, van der Waals force attachment mechanisms (e.g., Gecko tape), and suction devices (e.g., suction cups). In some embodiments, the skins are permanently attached to the case (e.g., with an adhesive). - In some embodiments, a color-changing material is incorporated into a decorative sheeting material. In some embodiments, the decorative sheeting material is permanently or semi-permanently incorporated into a case for a mobile electronic device.
FIG. 44B illustrates a partial cross sectional view of a portion of some embodiments of adecorative sheeting 4409. Thedecorative sheeting 4409 includes a first layer comprising afirst substrate 4410. Thefirst substrate 4410 is made of any suitable substrate material, including but not limited to plastic and/or polymer films, such as polyester films (e.g., Mylar). Thedecorative sheeting 4409 includes a second layer comprising asecond substrate sub-layer 4416 and a color-changingmaterial sub-layer 4412 that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions. In some embodiments, the color changingmaterial sub-layer 4412 includes thermochromic liquid crystals. The first layer and the second layer are layered with respect to one another such that the color-changingmaterial sub-layer 4412 is between thefirst substrate 4410 and thesecond substrate 4416. In some embodiments, the second layer includes an ultra-violet radiation inhibitingmaterial sub-layer 4414. In some embodiments, the ultra-violet radiation inhibitingmaterial sub-layer 4414 is oriented between thesecond substrate sub-layer 4416 and the color-changingmaterial sub-layer 4414. In some embodiments, the first layer, or thefirst substrate 4410 of the first layer, has an opaque coloring or is coated with an opaque material. In some embodiments, the opaque coloring is any dark color, while in some embodiments, the opaque coloring is substantially black. In some embodiments, thesecond substrate sub-layer 4416 and the ultra-violetradiation inhibiting sub-layer 4414 are transparent or semi-transparent, allowing the color changing-material sub-layer 4412 to be visible to a viewer of the case. - In some embodiments, the decorative sheeting 4409 (or the
4410, 4416 of the decorative sheeting 4409) are so dimensioned so as to cover substantially all of a surface of a case for a mobile electronic device, such as a mobile phone, music/audio player, laptop computer, tablet computer, and the like. In some embodiments, the dimensions correspond to a back surface of a case for a mobile electronic device.substrates - In some embodiments, the
decorative sheeting 4409 further comprises one or more edges defining through-holes between the first and second sides, wherein the one or more through-holes are configured to allow optical access through the sheet by a component of the mobile electronic device. For example, the through-holes are sometimes positioned so that a lens and/or a flash component of a mobile electronic device are not covered by the sheet. - In some embodiments, the
decorative sheeting 4409 is combined with amagnetic material 4406 to form a decorative skin for a mobile electronic device case, as described above. - In some embodiments, the range of temperatures between which the thermochromic material changes colors is 32-95 degrees Fahrenheit. In some embodiments, the temperature range is 50-95 degrees Fahrenheit. In some embodiments, the temperature range is 70-140 degrees Fahrenheit. The thermochromic material can be designed to display various colors, ranges of colors, or combinations of colors, in response to different material temperatures. In some embodiments, the material displays only two colors. In some embodiments, the material displays three or more colors. In some embodiments, the material may simultaneously display a first portion having a first color and a second portion having a second color. For example the material may display a blue portion and a green portion. In some embodiments, the material displays multiple portions and multiple colors (e.g., portions displaying blue, green, purple, red, orange, etc.).
- Throughout the discussion of thermochromic materials, it should be recognized that a thermochromic material may exhibit a particular color throughout a range of temperatures. In other words, when a material is described as having a color when the material is “at” or when the material “has” a certain temperature, it is understood that the color may appear within a range of temperatures. In some embodiments, a thermochromic material has a first color (e.g., black) when the material is between a first and a second temperature (e.g., between 60-70 degrees Fahrenheit), and a second color (e.g., blue) when the material is between a third and a fourth temperature (e.g., 120-140 degrees Fahrenheit). In some embodiments, the thermochromic material changes fluidly between the first and second color as the temperature rises from the second to the third temperature. A material (or combination of materials) may also exhibit more than one color in response to a single temperature or temperature range. Furthermore, a thermochromic material may exhibit the same or a similar color at two non-contiguous temperature ranges. For example, a thermochromic material may be black when the material is between 60 and 70 degrees Fahrenheit, and black when the material is above 95 degrees Fahrenheit, while displaying various other colors in the intermediate temperature region.
- Several types of thermochromic materials exist that are employed in various embodiments of the invention, including thermochromic liquid crystals, and/or Leuco dyes. One of skill in the art will recognize that these substances can be applied to a case in many different ways, and through the use of many different coatings. For example, a thermochromic material can be incorporated into paint, dye, epoxy, ink, wax, film, and/or any other type of coating or covering that will allow the thermochromic material to be seen by a user of the case. In some embodiments, the thermochromic material is embedded in paint or other coating that is applied to a portion of or all of the case. In some embodiments, multiple thermochromic materials are combined in a single paint or coating. For example, a first thermochromic material exhibiting a color change over a first temperature range and a second thermochromic material exhibiting a color change over a second temperature range may be combined to produce a paint or coating exhibiting interesting or desirable color-changing results. In some embodiments, more than two thermochromic materials are used in a single paint or coating.
- In some embodiments, the paint or coating is applied substantially only to outer portions of the case, such as those portions of the case that are visible when a mobile electronic device is in the case. In some embodiments, the thermochromic material is embedded in a polymer, plastic, elastomer, or other material that makes up a portion of or all of the case. For example, a surface of a case is sometimes made out of a plastic that has been treated with (or otherwise includes) a thermochromic material. In some embodiments, the entire case is molded from a plastic that has been treated with (or otherwise includes) a thermochromic material.
- In some embodiments, the color-changing material used in a case for a mobile electronic device is a photochromic material. Photochromic materials are materials that change color due to a change in the incident light. For instance, a photochromic material may change color when it is exposed to a change in intensity and/or wavelength of light. (As referred to herein, “light” can include electromagnetic radiation of many wavelengths, even those that are outside of the visible spectrum.) In some embodiments, photochromic materials include photochromic substances or molecules such as spiropyrans and spirooxazines, diarylethenes, azobenzenes, and/or photochromic quinones. Photochromic materials can be used instead of, or in addition to, the thermochromic materials described above. In particular, the disclosure relating to thermochromic materials is understood to apply by analogy to photochromic materials as well. Where the temperature of the thermochromic material is described as the cause of a color change, the wavelength or intensity of incident light on a photochromic material is understood to be the cause of a color change.
- In the foregoing description of thermochromic and photochromic materials, both the color-changing substances (e.g., the liquid crystals, Leuco dyes, and/or other color-changing molecules) and the materials that use such substances to display color-changing effects (e.g., film embedded with thermochromic dye, paint with thermochromic liquid crystals, etc) may be referred to as “photochromic materials” and/or “thermochromic materials.” Furthermore, any discussion relating to one type of color-changing material (e.g., thermochromic materials) is understood to apply to similar embodiments using other color-changing materials as well (e.g., photochromic materials).
- Also, any of the above described methods are understood to equally apply to methods of manufacturing cases with metameric materials. For example, some embodiments provide methods according to the above descriptions where metameric materials are substituted for color-changing materials and/or thermochromic materials.
- The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical applications, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best utilize the invention and various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.
-
FIG. 35 is a flowchart of amethod 3500 for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the method of manufacturing the cord management system may be performed by thecomputer system 2400. Thecomputer system 2400 forms (3502) a case for an object. Thecomputer system 2400 then forms (3504) a strap that is permanently attached to the case. In some embodiments, the strap includes a first attachment point at a first location on the strap and a second attachment point at a second location on the strap. In some embodiments, the strap includes at least two modes of operation. In a first mode of operation, the first attachment point is attached to the second attachment point. In a second mode of operation, the first attachment point is detached from the second attachment point. - In some embodiments, the
computer system 2400 forms (3506) a cord-attachment mechanism located at a third location on the case. - In some embodiments, the
computer system 2400 forms (3508) one or more button covers configured to protect one or more buttons of the object, while allowing the one or more buttons to be operable. - In some embodiments, the
computer system 2400 forms (3510) one or more holes configured to expose one or more elements of the object. -
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of amethod 3600 for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the method of manufacturing the cord management system may be performed by thecomputer system 2400. Thecomputer system 2400 forms (3602) a case for an object, comprising a semi-permanent case attachment mechanism at a first location. Thecomputer system 2400 then forms (3604) a strap for semi-permanently attaching to the case, comprising at least one semi-permanent strap attachment element at a first location on the strap, the semi-permanent strap attachment element configured to semi-permanently attach to the semi-permanent case attachment element; at least one first attachment point at a second location on the strap; and at least one second attachment point at a third location on the strap. In some embodiments, the strap includes at least two modes of operation. In a first mode of operation, the first attachment point is attached to the second attachment point. In a second mode of operation, the first attachment point is detached from the second attachment point. -
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of amethod 3700 for manufacturing a cord management system, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the method of manufacturing the cord management system may be performed by thecomputer system 2400. Thecomputer system 2400 forms (3702) a case for an object, the case having a front, a back, a bottom, a top, a first side, and a second side; wherein at least a portion of the back is made of a magnetic material; and wherein at least a portion of at least one of the front, bottom, top, first side, and second side is made of one or more non-magnetic materials. - In some embodiments, the
computer system 2400 forms (3704) a cord-attachment mechanism; one or more button covers; and one or more holes. -
FIG. 45 is a flow chart illustrating a method (4500) of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device with a color-changing material, according to some embodiments. A case for a mobile electronic device is provided (4502). In some embodiments, the case has a front, a back, a bottom, a top, a first side, and a second side (4504). In some embodiments, at least a portion of the back is made of a magnetic material (4506). In some embodiments, at least a portion of at least one of the front, bottom, top, first side, and second side is made of one or more non-magnetic materials (4508). A color-changing material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions is applied to at least a portion of the case (4510). In some embodiments, the color-changing material is painted on the case. For example, the color-changing material is sometimes sprayed or brushed on the case. In some embodiments, the color-changing material is printed on the case, for example, with an ink jet printing system. In some embodiments, the color-changing material is screen-pressed on the case. In some embodiments, the color changing material is incorporated in a covering that is removably attached to the case (4512), for example, a film and/or a sheet (e.g., thedecorative skin 4404, described above). In some embodiments, the covering is removably attached to the case (4514). In some embodiments, the covering is a magnetic sheet that is configured to be removably attached to a case that incorporates magnetic material. Sheets (or skins) are described in greater detail above with reference toFIG. 44A-B . In some embodiments, the covering is permanently or semi-permanently attached to the case. - In some embodiments, the color-changing material used in the above case is thermochromic (4516), while in other embodiments, the color-changing material is photochromic (4518). In some embodiments, the color-changing material uses both thermochromic and photochromic materials.
-
FIG. 46 is a flow chart illustrating a method (4600) of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device, according to some embodiments. One or more color-changing materials that change color when subjected to different environmental conditions are provided (4602). One or more non color-changing materials are provided (4604). In some embodiments, the color-changing material is thermochromic (4606). In some embodiments, the color-changing material is photochromic (4608). - In some embodiments, the case is manufactured according to an assembly process (4610). One or more color-changing portions for a case are formed using the one or more color-changing materials (4612). One or more non color-changing portions for a case are formed using the one or more color-changing materials (4614). A case for a mobile electronic device is created, where the case incorporates the one or more color-changing and the one or more non color-changing portions (4616). In some embodiments, the case is created by assembling the color-changing and non color-changing portions.
- In some embodiments, the case is manufactured according to a molding process (4618). A case for a mobile electronic device is formed including the color-changing and non color-changing materials (4620). In some embodiments, the case is formed by injection molding. In some embodiments, the color-changing material is a thermochromic material (such as thermochromic liquid crystals) that is incorporated into a non color-changing polymer that is then injection molded or thermoformed to form a case for a mobile electronic device.
-
FIG. 47 is a flow chart illustrating a method of manufacturing a case for a mobile electronic device, according to some embodiments (4700). A case for a mobile electronic device is provided (4702). Some thermochromic coatings exhibit improved visual results (i.e., more vivid colors and/or more colors) when they cover or are on top of a dark and/or black surface. Thus, in some embodiments, at least a portion of the case is black (4704). In some embodiments, the black portion of the case comprises a dark and/or black coating, such as a paint and/or a powder coating (4706). - A thermochromic coating is applied to at least a portion of the case (4708). In some embodiments, the thermochromic coating is any of: paint, ink, dye, film, and powder coatings. In some embodiments, the thermochromic coating is sprayed on the portion of the case. In some embodiments, the thermochromic coating is printed on the portion of the case. In some embodiments, the thermochromic coating is a decorative sheeting, e.g., the
decorative sheeting 4409. - In some embodiments, an ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating is applied over at least a portion of the thermochromic coating (4710). This layer helps protect the thermochromic material from degradation due to ultra-violet radiation. In some embodiments, a substantially clear coating is applied over at least a portion of the ultra-violet radiation inhibiting coating (4712). The substantially clear coating is sometimes a hard, protective coating to help prevent the thermochromic and/or the ultra-violet inhibiting coatings from being chipped, peeled, scratched, or otherwise damaged. In some embodiments, an ultra-violet inhibiting material is incorporated into a substantially clear coating, in order to reduce the number of steps in the method (4700). In some embodiments, the ultra-violet inhibiting material is sprayed, printed, screen-pressed, and/or painted on the case.
-
FIG. 48 illustrates a method of manufacturing a decorative sheeting, according to some embodiments (4800). A first layer is provided, where the first layer comprises a first substrate (4802). In some embodiments, a substantially black coating is applied to the first substrate (4803). - A second substrate is provided (4804). In some embodiments, an ultra-violet inhibiting material is applied to the second substrate (4805). In some embodiments, the ultra-violet inhibiting material is a coating that is sprayed or painted on. In some embodiments, the ultra-violet inhibiting material is a film.
- A color-changing material is applied to the second substrate (or to the ultra-violet inhibiting material) to form a second layer (4806). The color-changing material is a material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions, such as a thermochromic or photochromic material.
- The first layer and the second layer are layered to form a decorative sheeting (4808). When the two layers are combined in the layering step (4808), the two layers are oriented with respect to one another such that the color-changing material is between the first substrate and the second substrate.
- The ultra-violet inhibiting material applied in step (4805) helps protect the color-changing material from degradation due to ultra-violet radiation. As such, in some embodiments, it is applied to the substrates such that, when the decorative sheeting is applied to an object, the color-changing material is between the object and the ultra-violet inhibiting material.
- In the above description, where a material is described as applied to a substrate, one of skill in the art will understood that the material can be applied directly to the substrate, or applied to another sub-layer or material already applied to the substrate.
-
FIG. 49 illustrates a method of using a case for a mobile electronic device, where the case comprises a color-changing material (4900). A case is provided, where a portion of the case comprises a color-changing material that changes color when subjected to different environmental conditions (4902). At least a portion of the color-changing material is changed from a first environmental condition to a second environmental condition (4904). In some embodiments, a user causes the color-changing material to be changed from a first temperature to a second temperature. In some embodiments, the user uses a finger, flashlight, laser, heat pen, and/or heat brush, or other object to cause the temperature change. In response to the change in environmental condition, the color-changing material changes from a first color to a second color (4906). - The methods 3500-3700 and 4500-4800 may be governed by instructions that are stored in one or more computer readable storage mediums and that are executed by one or more processors of one or more computer systems. Each of the operations shown in
FIGS. 35-37 and 45-48 may correspond to instructions stored in a computer memory or computer readable storage medium. The computer readable storage medium may include a magnetic or optical disk storage device, solid state storage devices such as Flash memory, or other non-volatile memory device or devices. The computer readable instructions stored on the computer readable storage medium are in source code, assembly language code, object code, or other instruction format that is interpreted and/or executable by one or more processors. - The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the disclosed ideas to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles and practical applications of the disclosed inventions, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best utilize them in various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.
Claims (20)
1. A case for a mobile electronic device, the case comprising:
a removable magnetic material back that covers substantially all of a back side of the mobile electronic device when the mobile electronic device is housed within the case, the removable magnetic material back including:
magnetic material;
a substantially planar exterior surface facing away from the mobile electronic device when the mobile electronic device is housed within the case; and
a skin including magnetic material, wherein the skin is configured to be removably coupled with the substantially planar exterior surface of the removable magnetic material back via magnetic attraction between the removable magnetic material back of the case and the magnetic material of the skin.
2. The case of claim 1 , wherein the removable magnetic material back is configured to be slidably removed from the case.
3. The case of claim 2 , wherein the case further comprises a pocket and the removable magnetic material back is configured to be slidably removed from a top portion of the pocket.
4. The case of claim 2 , wherein the case further comprises a pocket and the removable magnetic material back is configured to be slidably removed from a side portion of the pocket.
5. The case of claim 3 , wherein the pocket is transparent.
6. The case of claim 3 , wherein the pocket includes tracks configured to receive the removable magnetic material back and to keep the removable magnetic material back firmly in place.
7. The case of claim 3 , wherein the pocket is waterproof.
8. The case of claim 4 , wherein the pocket is transparent.
9. The case of claim 4 , wherein the pocket includes tracks configured to receive the removable magnetic material back and to keep the removable magnetic material back firmly in place.
10. The case of claim 4 , wherein the pocket is waterproof.
11. The case of claim 1 , further comprising, a rim of encapsulating material that is configured to receive the removable magnetic material back and is further configured to hold the removable magnetic material back in place by stretching the rim of encapsulating material around the removable magnetic material back.
12. The case of claim 11 , wherein the rim of encapsulating material is waterproof.
13. The case of claim 1 , wherein the skin is configured to cover substantially all of the substantially planar exterior surface of the removable magnetic material back when the skin is removably coupled with the substantially planar exterior surface of the removable magnetic material back.
14. The case of claim 1 , the case further comprising:
a bumper disposed between the removable magnetic material back and the mobile electronic device when the mobile electronic device is housed within the case, wherein the bumper prevents the mobile electronic device from contacting the magnetic material of the removable magnetic material back.
15. The case of claim 14 , wherein the bumper comprises a piece of foam, rubber, plastic, fabric, or leather.
16. The case of claim 1 , wherein the skin further includes:
a representational design, wherein when the skin is subject to a first environmental condition, the representational design is substantially the same color as an area of the skin near the representational design; and
wherein when the skin is subject to a second environmental condition, the representational design is a different color than the area of the skin near the representational design.
17. The case of claim 16 , wherein the representational design is a temperature indicating design illustrating a temperature of the mobile electronic device housed within the case.
18. The case of claim 16 , wherein the representational design is a temperature indicating design illustrating a temperature of the air surrounding the case.
19. The case of claim 16 , wherein the representational design is at least partially thermally insulated from the mobile electronic device housed within the case.
20. The case of claim 16 , wherein the representational design comprises a flower, an animal, and/or a face.
Priority Applications (3)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US14/750,538 US20150305462A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2015-06-25 | Case With A Removable Magnetic Material Back For A Mobile Electronic Device |
| US15/462,472 US20170194999A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2017-03-17 | Magnetic cases for mobile electronic devices |
| US15/724,060 US20180324288A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2017-10-03 | Magnetic Housing Configured for Wireless Communication |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/US2010/031087 WO2011129823A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2010-04-14 | Cord management system |
| PCT/US2010/053244 WO2011129847A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2010-10-19 | Cord management system |
| US13/093,748 US20110253571A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2011-04-25 | Cord Management System |
| US14/750,538 US20150305462A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2015-06-25 | Case With A Removable Magnetic Material Back For A Mobile Electronic Device |
Related Parent Applications (2)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US13/093,748 Continuation US20110253571A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2011-04-25 | Cord Management System |
| US13/093,748 Continuation-In-Part US20110253571A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2011-04-25 | Cord Management System |
Related Child Applications (2)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US15/462,472 Continuation US20170194999A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2017-03-17 | Magnetic cases for mobile electronic devices |
| US15/724,060 Continuation US20180324288A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2017-10-03 | Magnetic Housing Configured for Wireless Communication |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| US20150305462A1 true US20150305462A1 (en) | 2015-10-29 |
Family
ID=44787392
Family Applications (4)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US13/093,748 Abandoned US20110253571A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2011-04-25 | Cord Management System |
| US14/750,538 Abandoned US20150305462A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2015-06-25 | Case With A Removable Magnetic Material Back For A Mobile Electronic Device |
| US15/462,472 Abandoned US20170194999A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2017-03-17 | Magnetic cases for mobile electronic devices |
| US15/724,060 Abandoned US20180324288A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2017-10-03 | Magnetic Housing Configured for Wireless Communication |
Family Applications Before (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US13/093,748 Abandoned US20110253571A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2011-04-25 | Cord Management System |
Family Applications After (2)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US15/462,472 Abandoned US20170194999A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2017-03-17 | Magnetic cases for mobile electronic devices |
| US15/724,060 Abandoned US20180324288A1 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2017-10-03 | Magnetic Housing Configured for Wireless Communication |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| US (4) | US20110253571A1 (en) |
Cited By (7)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20160198821A1 (en) * | 2015-01-13 | 2016-07-14 | Thomas Gerard Carpenter | Collar for portable device |
| US20170150247A1 (en) * | 2015-11-25 | 2017-05-25 | Neocoil, Llc | Method and Apparatus for Delivering Audio Signals and Providing Hearing Protection During Medical Imaging |
| US9826789B2 (en) * | 2014-08-09 | 2017-11-28 | Apple Inc. | Milanese band |
| US11220411B2 (en) * | 2020-02-18 | 2022-01-11 | Coil Pro, LLC | Coiler with accompanying attachments and bag |
| WO2023044110A3 (en) * | 2021-09-20 | 2023-04-20 | Star Co Scientific Technologies Advanced Research Co, Llc D/B/A Star Co | Modular electronics box enabling device interchangeability |
| US20230119515A1 (en) * | 2021-10-19 | 2023-04-20 | Alicia Sarran | Bag strap support device and method |
| US20230157438A1 (en) * | 2021-11-19 | 2023-05-25 | Clara Martinez | Wearable mobile device holder |
Families Citing this family (37)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| USD633908S1 (en) | 2010-04-19 | 2011-03-08 | Apple Inc. | Electronic device |
| USD627778S1 (en) | 2010-04-19 | 2010-11-23 | Apple Inc. | Electronic device |
| US8615849B2 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2013-12-31 | Cjd Llc | Cord management system |
| USD666202S1 (en) | 2010-06-05 | 2012-08-28 | Apple Inc. | Housing plate |
| USD676033S1 (en) | 2010-09-24 | 2013-02-12 | Cjd Llc | Case with metal back for a cord management system |
| USD676837S1 (en) * | 2010-10-29 | 2013-02-26 | Cjd Llc | Case with metal back and framed front for an electronic communications device with wire management system |
| CN102679100A (en) * | 2011-03-10 | 2012-09-19 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Support frame |
| EP2739409A4 (en) | 2011-08-05 | 2015-04-01 | Gui Global Products Ltd | APPARATUS FOR CLEANING DISPLAY SCREENS AND OBJECTIVES AND METHOD OF USE |
| US9235230B1 (en) | 2012-01-09 | 2016-01-12 | Logitech Europe S.A. | Magnetic stand, mount and cord wrap for mobile devices and accessories |
| US9371218B2 (en) * | 2012-07-15 | 2016-06-21 | Cosda Manufacturing Company | Moldable funnel |
| US9124053B2 (en) | 2012-09-17 | 2015-09-01 | Justin M Metras | Cordage restraint and management system |
| USD684846S1 (en) | 2012-10-19 | 2013-06-25 | Dawn DePhillips | Cord retainer |
| US20200137906A9 (en) * | 2012-11-05 | 2020-04-30 | Gui Global Products, Ltd. | Devices and accessories employing a living hinge |
| JP2016502182A (en) | 2012-11-05 | 2016-01-21 | ジーユーアイ グローバル プロダクツ,リミテッド | Devices and accessories that use living hinges |
| US9615650B2 (en) * | 2013-12-02 | 2017-04-11 | Superior Communications, Inc. | Armband for an electronic device |
| HU230933B1 (en) * | 2016-01-12 | 2019-04-29 | Gyula Sebő | Remote-controlled object release mechanism with a fastening strap |
| US10129375B1 (en) * | 2017-05-11 | 2018-11-13 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Thin section interlock geometry for molding plastic |
| US20190053590A1 (en) * | 2017-08-16 | 2019-02-21 | Case-Mate, Inc. | Electronics case with thermochromic panel |
| US11033083B1 (en) | 2017-09-15 | 2021-06-15 | Apple Inc. | Wristbands with magnetic coupling |
| US11643864B2 (en) | 2018-01-23 | 2023-05-09 | Pella Corporation | Screen edge retention and screen rethreading features for a hidden screen assembly and a fenestration assembly |
| US10630824B2 (en) | 2018-03-22 | 2020-04-21 | Apple Inc. | Electronic devices with adjustable decoration |
| US11020848B2 (en) * | 2018-03-29 | 2021-06-01 | Thomas P. Macauda | Ergonomic trough-support system |
| EP3837179B1 (en) * | 2018-08-14 | 2022-08-24 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Adaptive packaging |
| US11315716B2 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2022-04-26 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Process and apparatus for the magnetization of magnetizable materials |
| CN112424078B (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2022-08-12 | 宝洁公司 | Conformable Packaging |
| EP3837180A1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2021-06-23 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Package with integrated magnetic valve |
| SE543562C2 (en) * | 2018-09-05 | 2021-03-30 | Carina Svensson | Bag with changeable bag cover |
| USD905040S1 (en) * | 2019-08-22 | 2020-12-15 | Catalyst Medium Four, Inc. | Configurable strap accessory for a mobile communications device |
| JP7263682B2 (en) * | 2019-09-20 | 2023-04-25 | 秀夫 西村 | earphone cord holder |
| CA3107553C (en) | 2020-01-31 | 2023-08-22 | Pella Corporation | Integrated pleated screen assembly |
| US11769616B2 (en) * | 2020-05-08 | 2023-09-26 | Apple Inc. | Items with magnetic straps and cables |
| US12127651B1 (en) * | 2020-07-01 | 2024-10-29 | Apple Inc. | Items with hidden magnets |
| US11375056B2 (en) | 2020-08-07 | 2022-06-28 | Catalyst Media Four, Inc. | Magnetically configurable strap accessory for a mobile communications device |
| US20240057662A1 (en) * | 2021-01-08 | 2024-02-22 | Brian Rains | Magnetic band for smoking device |
| KR102586884B1 (en) * | 2021-07-13 | 2023-10-06 | 박종섭 | Mobile phone accessory with a magnetic band for freely grip and mount |
| US12389093B2 (en) * | 2022-06-24 | 2025-08-12 | Quoyi Innovative Products, Inc. | Cross-partition camera system |
| US12310472B1 (en) | 2022-08-24 | 2025-05-27 | Apple Inc. | Cases for electronic devices |
Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US3741376A (en) * | 1970-10-08 | 1973-06-26 | Magni Case Inc | Pocket holder with magnetic clasp |
| US7318521B2 (en) * | 2004-09-21 | 2008-01-15 | Creative Technology Ltd | Pouch with integrated stand |
| US7555325B2 (en) * | 2001-11-03 | 2009-06-30 | Jean Goros | Protective sleeve for small portable electronic devices |
| US20100224519A1 (en) * | 2009-03-03 | 2010-09-09 | Yuan Kao | Thin Object Holder Apparatus for Use with a Portable Device Patent |
Family Cites Families (9)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS5864211U (en) * | 1981-10-27 | 1983-04-30 | カネボウ株式会社 | cosmetic container |
| FI982837L (en) * | 1998-12-30 | 2000-07-01 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Electronic device, electronic device casing and electronic device casing manufacturing method |
| US20070023559A1 (en) * | 2005-07-26 | 2007-02-01 | James Scapillato | Electronic device case |
| CN101291857B (en) * | 2005-08-12 | 2010-05-26 | 罗德尼·P·瓦伊塔尔 | Apparatus and method for using thermochromic and photochromic indicators |
| KR101304035B1 (en) * | 2007-08-24 | 2013-09-04 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Protective cover for portable communication device |
| US9007747B2 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2015-04-14 | Fellowes, Inc. | Slider case for portable electronic device |
| US20110034220A1 (en) * | 2009-08-07 | 2011-02-10 | Chang-Chun Lee | Handset jacket structure |
| US8800762B2 (en) * | 2009-08-12 | 2014-08-12 | Incipio Technologies, Inc. | Protective cases for mobile devices |
| US8167126B2 (en) * | 2009-09-29 | 2012-05-01 | Apple Inc. | Button mechanisms for electronic device cases |
-
2011
- 2011-04-25 US US13/093,748 patent/US20110253571A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2015
- 2015-06-25 US US14/750,538 patent/US20150305462A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2017
- 2017-03-17 US US15/462,472 patent/US20170194999A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2017-10-03 US US15/724,060 patent/US20180324288A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US3741376A (en) * | 1970-10-08 | 1973-06-26 | Magni Case Inc | Pocket holder with magnetic clasp |
| US7555325B2 (en) * | 2001-11-03 | 2009-06-30 | Jean Goros | Protective sleeve for small portable electronic devices |
| US7318521B2 (en) * | 2004-09-21 | 2008-01-15 | Creative Technology Ltd | Pouch with integrated stand |
| US20100224519A1 (en) * | 2009-03-03 | 2010-09-09 | Yuan Kao | Thin Object Holder Apparatus for Use with a Portable Device Patent |
Cited By (12)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US9826789B2 (en) * | 2014-08-09 | 2017-11-28 | Apple Inc. | Milanese band |
| US10716344B2 (en) * | 2014-08-09 | 2020-07-21 | Apple Inc. | Milanese band |
| US11583018B2 (en) * | 2014-08-09 | 2023-02-21 | Apple Inc. | Milanese band |
| US20160198821A1 (en) * | 2015-01-13 | 2016-07-14 | Thomas Gerard Carpenter | Collar for portable device |
| US10004308B2 (en) * | 2015-01-13 | 2018-06-26 | Thomas Gerard Carpenter | Collar for portable device |
| US20170150247A1 (en) * | 2015-11-25 | 2017-05-25 | Neocoil, Llc | Method and Apparatus for Delivering Audio Signals and Providing Hearing Protection During Medical Imaging |
| US10091574B2 (en) * | 2015-11-25 | 2018-10-02 | Neocoil, Llc | Method and apparatus for delivering audio signals and providing hearing protection during medical imaging |
| US11220411B2 (en) * | 2020-02-18 | 2022-01-11 | Coil Pro, LLC | Coiler with accompanying attachments and bag |
| WO2023044110A3 (en) * | 2021-09-20 | 2023-04-20 | Star Co Scientific Technologies Advanced Research Co, Llc D/B/A Star Co | Modular electronics box enabling device interchangeability |
| US12149650B2 (en) | 2021-09-20 | 2024-11-19 | Star Co Scientific Technologies Advanced Research Co, Llc | Modular electronics box enabling device interchangeability |
| US20230119515A1 (en) * | 2021-10-19 | 2023-04-20 | Alicia Sarran | Bag strap support device and method |
| US20230157438A1 (en) * | 2021-11-19 | 2023-05-25 | Clara Martinez | Wearable mobile device holder |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| US20180324288A1 (en) | 2018-11-08 |
| US20170194999A1 (en) | 2017-07-06 |
| US20110253571A1 (en) | 2011-10-20 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US20170194999A1 (en) | Magnetic cases for mobile electronic devices | |
| US9445178B2 (en) | Cord management system | |
| US20110252607A1 (en) | Cord Management System | |
| WO2011129847A1 (en) | Cord management system | |
| US8590823B2 (en) | Cord management system | |
| US8841556B2 (en) | Magnetic cord management system | |
| JP6527208B2 (en) | Devices and accessories using living hinges | |
| US9496911B2 (en) | Protective cover and retractable lanyard | |
| US20140183065A1 (en) | Cover for mobile telephone | |
| US9718640B2 (en) | Retractable badge reel with button display | |
| US20130336515A1 (en) | Y-shaped headphone / earbud cord sleeve | |
| JP6659179B2 (en) | Watch or similar protective equipment and method | |
| US20140183066A1 (en) | Cover for Mobile Telephone | |
| CN117201992A (en) | Tethered strap for wireless headphones | |
| US20150055813A1 (en) | Wearable malleable earphone case | |
| TWM277220U (en) | Improved earphone structure | |
| WO2011129823A1 (en) | Cord management system | |
| US9445180B1 (en) | Method of storing headphones | |
| CN219919117U (en) | Bluetooth earphone charging device | |
| JP5411343B1 (en) | Mobile strap forming string with an article only on one side and mobile strap creation kit | |
| WO2017189247A1 (en) | Retractable badge reel with button display | |
| JP3211908U (en) | Case for mobile terminal | |
| TWM484260U (en) | Cellular phone case | |
| JP2013005955A (en) | Connecting strap and method for connecting article with connecting strap | |
| KR20170004161U (en) | Decorative ring |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |